JP7096860B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachislot machine equipped with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Outputs a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. do. The stepping motor transfers its driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols is given to the player. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the operation of the replay (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the game medium (medals, etc.) is paid out and the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. Further, it is possible to give a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Here, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the formation of a specific small winning combination, for example, the display of a combination of symbols related to the payout of the game medium is navigated by a lamp, a liquid crystal display device, or the like (navigation is performed). ) There is a state of the game in which the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") is executed.

By the way, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, a game having a so-called ceiling function, which conventionally gives a gaming state advantageous to the player when the gaming state advantageous to the player is not given until the predetermined number of games is reached. The machine is known (for example, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-169881

However, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined number of games is reached, an advantageous state is given to the player regardless of the result of the games up to that point. For this reason, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced until the specified number of games is reached. By the way, conventionally, in a game of a specific period such as a pseudo bonus, it is difficult for the player to get bored, and it has been required to further improve the interest of the game of the specific period. That is, there has been a demand for the development of a technique for further improving the interest of the gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the enjoyment of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

As a gaming state for notifying information on a stop operation advantageous to the player, it has a first state (for example, a mode other than the "rocket mode" described later) and a second state (for example, the "rocket mode" described later). , A gaming machine capable of giving benefits (for example, a pseudo bonus described later) according to the game result.
It relates to a specific symbol combination (for example, "reach eye rip 3, 4, 5" described later) when a specific combination (for example, "reach eye rip 3, 4, 5" described later) is won in the first state. Design combination) can be displayed,
When the specific combination is won in the first state, the information regarding the stop operation for avoiding the display of the specific symbol combination is notified.
When the specific combination is won in the second state, the information regarding the stop operation for displaying all the symbol combinations including the symbol combinations other than the specific symbol combination is not notified, or the specific symbol combination is used. Notifies information about the stop operation to be displayed,
The privilege is not given when the specific combination is won in the first state, and is given when the specific combination is won in the second state.
The privilege grants the right to execute the third state (for example, a pseudo bonus described later).
The third state is a gaming state that is different from the first state and the second state and that informs information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest in the gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the auxiliary control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) for CB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for turning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of a forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (except when MB is activated) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table (when MB (CB) is operated) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table in the continuous lock state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in non-MB) of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in MB) of a winning combination and a stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition form in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a table summarizing the activation condition and the termination condition of each RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in ART) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in confirmation screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (during the end of the pseudo-bonus end waiting) table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in a rocket) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (normal) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (ART preparation) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in confirmation screen) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (in BB) table (9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (waiting for the end of pseudo bonus) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of achievement of the specified game in NRB) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (at the time of achievement of the specified game in SRB) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery (when BG challenge succeeds) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (the 1) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (2) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table (3) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table in NRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR lottery game number table in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (No. 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don alignment permission flag table (No. 5) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (No. 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don alignment permission flag table (7) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the don alignment permission flag table (9) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XBB continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XBB stock table at the time of XBB continuation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous stock lottery (normal) table in XBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB medium navigation addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NRB forced shortening lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (the 1) which added the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (2) with the number of games in SRB added in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (3) which adds the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (the 4) which added the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (the 5) which added the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (6) which added the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table (7) which added the number of games in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery game number table lottery table at the start of SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table (No. 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR contents lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR basic G number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR additional addition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo bonus lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (No. 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR continuous lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct migration lottery (during ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival direct transition lottery (in XR) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival transition lottery (in XR) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode transition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocket mode continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the loop lottery table at the end of ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (in ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge content lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BG challenge mode transition table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7, don BB transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7, don BB transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7, don BB transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (red 7, don BB transition) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 0) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 0) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 0) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 0) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 1) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 1) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 1) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 1) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (directing state 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (normal medium) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (in ART) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the winning number correction processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop button detection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the priority pull-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus end check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process at the end of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus operation check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal state transition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal process (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ART preparation process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ART preparation process (winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in ART (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the XR emission processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state transition process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (winning) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in XR (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in XR (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in XR (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing (winning) in XR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in XRC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in a rocket (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in a rocket (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in BGZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in BGZ (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the confirmation screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process (winning) in the confirmation screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in NRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in SRB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in XBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus end waiting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo-bonus end time (winning time) processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table in another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional value lottery table in another embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in another embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a battle BGZ in another embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the battle BGZ (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing the first embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having a function of operating a higher gaming state than normal, that is, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") function is operated at the same time will be described. ..

<Functional flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into a pachislot machine by a player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws lots based on the extracted random number values, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. conduct. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set. The number is set for one symbol.

When the internal winning combination that permits the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 when the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and the “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously operate the “CB”, which are the second type special accessories, are operated. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within the specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the valid line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line is related to the winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof can be performed. Various productions are performed using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for staging (hereinafter referred to as a random value for staging) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel rotation starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
First, the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable.

Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handles 7 on one side are shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is made of a concave member, and a worker's hand is hung on the handle 7 when the pachi-slot machine 1 is transported.

As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 described later, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided inside the cabinet 2a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are laterally oriented (reels). Are arranged in a row in the direction orthogonal to the direction of rotation of. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction), and the symbols adjacent to each other along the arrangement direction of the symbols are arranged at predetermined intervals. To.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3), and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (4L, 4C, 4R) for displaying symbols drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Display screen) 11a is provided. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed by using the entire display unit 11a including the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided to do. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind them through the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

In the present embodiment, each display window is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols drawn (arranged) on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window is stopped. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (hereinafter, referred to as the upper area, the middle area, and the lower area, respectively) are provided in the frame of each display window for each reel. One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. That is, the symbols are displayed in the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R in a 3 × 3 arrangement form. Then, in the present embodiment, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not to win. do.

The front panel 10 is attached so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display unit 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the upper part of the door body 9, and is arranged so as to be superimposed on the front surface of the display unit 11a. The door. The front panel 10 is transparent to close the decorative frame 101 in which the three panel openings 101a for exposing the necessary display screen area in the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 are formed, and the three panel openings 101a in the decorative frame 101. Has a protective cover 102 (see FIG. 2).

Further, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R (hereinafter, referred to as a left effect switch 22L and a right effect switch 22R).

The lamp group 21 includes, for example, a lamp 21a provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 and a lamp 21b provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 3). Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the left effect switch 22L is provided on the left side portion of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is provided on the lower left corner portion of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. Be placed. On the other hand, the right effect switch 22R is provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is arranged on the lower right corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. The left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R are switches that are selected and pressed by the player during the alternative effect called "Billy Get Challenge" described later.

Further, the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

The central movable unit 105 is arranged in the central portion near the upper end in the decorative frame 101 and has a movable component 309. For example, the central movable unit 105 rotates and lowers the movable component 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the left-right direction when a specific effect is performed. As a result, the movable component 309 moves to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

The left movable unit 106 is arranged near the left end in the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188. Further, the right movable unit 107 is arranged near the right end in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189. The left movable unit 106, for example, rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about a shaft extending in the vertical direction when a predetermined effect is performed. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated when a predetermined effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the waist panel 12 is provided substantially in the center of the door body 9, and the waist panel 12 is formed with a pedestal portion 13. The pedestal portion 13 has various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, clearing button 18, etc.) to be operated by the player. ) Is provided.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside into the pachi-slot machine 1 by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to be used for one game. Further, the settlement button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 5) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). This 7-segment display 6 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is displayed digitally.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, the two speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a diagram showing a state when the front door 2b is opened with respect to the cabinet 2a.

The cabinet 2a is composed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member having one side open on the front side (front door 2b side).

A main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 5) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end portion in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R is provided in the vicinity of the central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 4, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 5) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and discharging them one by one is provided near the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a. Further, in the vicinity of the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a, on one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 4) of the hopper 33, a power supply device 34 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided. Be done.

A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end of the front door 2b on the back surface side (opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided near the substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, etc. of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) is appropriate, and the medal determined to be appropriate is selected as the hopper 33. I will guide you to. Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 5) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. Note that FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, FIG. 6 is a block configuration diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Includes 66.

The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) a clock pulse. Then, the main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, various sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like, and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 18S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) is pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35.

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display unit drive circuit 64, and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50, and outputs the detection result to the microcomputer 50.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, whereby the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, the number of reels is equivalent to the number of symbols). Only rotated) is managed.

Here, a method for managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1". "Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts. do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50, and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

[Secondary control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. The sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86, as shown in FIG. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable unit. The unit drive circuit 98 and the rotary light drive circuit 99 are included.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random value for effect extraction to determine the effect content (effect data), and the effect data. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by 20L and 20R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and BGM (Back-Ground Music). It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data related to sounds and sound effects, and a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content, effect data, and the like, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 41.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L, 20R, a lamp group 21, a left effect switch 22L, a right effect switch 22R, a central movable unit 105, and a left movable unit. Peripheral devices such as 106, a right movable unit 107, and a rotary lamp 124 are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is generated by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

The sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, D / A converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data designated by the effect content.

The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 according to the central movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed, and moves the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the beacon drive circuit 99 drive the beacon 124 according to the beacon drive data specified by the effect content.

Further, the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R each detect that they have been pressed by the player, and transmit the detection results to the sub-control circuit 42 described later.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 43.

[Design layout table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 7). Refer to the symbol code table in)) and specify the correspondence with).

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, " "0" to "20" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "20") and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the display window. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L, respectively. The symbol "REP1", the symbol "BEL1" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "WML1" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (No. 1 to No. 8) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a predetermined combination of symbols according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, not only the symbol combination related to the privilege (bonus, medal payout, re-game) but also the symbol that becomes the trigger when the RT game state shifts to the RT1 game state is displayed in the symbol combination table. The combination (see the symbol combination related to the code name "KB01" (G_RT1 transition) in FIG. 8) is also described as a display combination.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 44 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 62 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to differences in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination (G_15-sheet bell_3) according to any of the code names "BL01" to "BL03" is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted three medals. , 15 medals are paid out (see FIGS. 13 and 14). Further, for example, when the display combination (G_14 bells) related to the code name "BM01" is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted three medals, 14 medals are paid out (14 medals are paid out). See FIG. 14).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the replay (for example, the symbol combination of the display combination (G_control lip_1) related to the code name “Z001” in FIG. 8) is determined as the display combination, the replay is performed. Works. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to "MB (middle bonus)" (the symbol combination of the display combination (G_MB) related to the code name "MB01" in FIG. 8) is determined as the display combination. MB (CB) is activated.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. When the bonus is activated, the bonus activation table is stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 45 described later), the bonus end number counter, the game possible count counter, and the winning count counter provided in the main RAM 53. Specifies the data to be done.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game being operated. In the present embodiment, a middle bonus (hereinafter referred to as “MB”) and a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) are provided as types of bonus games. "CB" is a so-called type 2 special character. The "MB" is called a bonus continuous actuating device related to the type 2 special bonus, and the "CB" is continuously actuated. Therefore, when "MB" is activated, "CB" is also activated.

The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, "MB" is activated when the symbol combination corresponding to the display combination related to the code name "MB01" in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 8 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and then the specified number is executed. When the payout of medals exceeding "14" is made, "MB" ends.

In the operation of the above-mentioned "MB", first, at the start of the bonus, the numerical value (specified number) specified in the bonus operation table is stored in the bonus end number counter. Then, each time the medal is paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than "0", the operating bonus ends.

The playable number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can be played when the “CB” is activated, that is, the so-called playable number of times. The winning count counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can display the combination of symbols related to winning when the "MB (CB)" is operated, that is, the so-called winning count. However, it is not specified in this embodiment.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the migration source and the migration destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states, from the RT0 game state to the RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, it is a transition condition between the RT gaming states that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Specifically, the code names "BP01" (G_ push order failure 1 card combination 1), "BP02" (G_ push order failure 1 card combination 2) and "R001" (G_RT0) regardless of the RT game state of the migration source. When the symbol combination of the display combination according to any of the transition rips) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, regardless of the RT game state of the migration source, the symbol combination of the display combination related to any of the code names "KB01" (G_RT1 transition) and "R101" (G_RT1 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In that case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name "R201" (G_RT2 migration lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the RT gaming state of the migration source, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Move to. Further, regardless of the RT game state of the migration source, the symbol combination of the display combination related to any of the code names "R301" (G_RT3 migration lip_1) to "R311" (G_RT3 migration lip_11) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. If so, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. Further, when the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name "R401" (G_RT4 migration lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the RT gaming state of the migration source, the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state. Move to.

The characteristics of each RT gaming state and the transition flow between the RT gaming states will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between each game state and the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery sets set in each game state.

Specifically, in the general game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for the general game state is used, and "50" is set as the number of lottery. Further, in the CB game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for CB is used, and "35" is set as the number of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning number and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each of the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) and the CB gaming state.

Further, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed, for example, by using a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is specified as a lottery value corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially with. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the higher the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (data pointer described later) will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT0)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general gaming state is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "50" and the lottery value.

For example, in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the probability that the winning number "2" (abbreviated as "F_RT0 lip") is won by referring to the setting 6 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is "8978/65536". ". Then, when the winning number "2" is won, "2" is acquired as the data pointer described later.

In the internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0), as shown in FIG. 19, a predetermined lottery value (5467) is defined for each of the winning numbers "38" to "40". If any of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is won, the internal winning combination related to any of the abbreviations "F_middle bell 1" to "F_right middle left bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination. ..

As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 25, which will be described later, these internal winning combinations include a transition combination (code name “KB01” (G_RT1 transition)) that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. .. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Sometimes.

(2) Internal lottery table for RT1 FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RT1. The RT1 internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table for RT1, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "35" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 19 is the inside for RT1. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the internal lottery table for RT1, as shown in FIG. 20, predetermined lottery values are specified for each of the winning numbers "3" to "9". If any of the winning numbers "3" to "9" is won, the internal winning combination according to any of the abbreviations "F_RT2 transfer-213" to "F_3 continuous use donlip" is determined as the internal winning combination.

As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 25, which will be described later, these internal winning combinations include various transition combinations (code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip), code name "R201" (code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip)) for shifting the RT game state. G_RT2 transition lip), code names "R301" to "R311" (G_RT3 transition lip)) are included. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "3" to "9" is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state according to the winning type. May shift to any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state.

(3) Internal lottery table for RT2 FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RT2. The internal lottery table for RT2 is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table for RT2, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "35" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 19 is the inside for RT2. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the internal lottery table for RT2, as shown in FIG. 21, predetermined lottery values are specified for each of the winning numbers "10" to "16". If any of the winning numbers "10" to "16" is won, the internal winning combination according to any of the abbreviations "F_Middle Don 0 Transition 2nd" to "F_RB Fake" is determined as the internal winning combination.

As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 25, which will be described later, various internal winning combinations (code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip), code name "R101" (G_RT1 transition)) are used for these internal winning combinations. Lip), code names "R301" to "R311" (G_RT3 transition lip), code names "R401" (G_RT4 transition lip)) are included. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "10" to "16" is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state according to the winning type. May shift to any of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

(4) Internal lottery table for RT3 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RT3. The internal lottery table for RT3 is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table for RT3, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "35" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 19 is the inside for RT3. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the internal lottery table for RT3, as shown in FIG. 22, predetermined lottery values are specified for the winning numbers "1", "17" to "23", "30" and "31", respectively. If any of the winning numbers "1", "17" to "23", "30" and "31" wins, the abbreviations "F_normal lip" and "F_don lower fake" to "F_" will be used as internal winning roles. The internal winning combination pertaining to any of "Don middle stage alignment", "F_RT4 transition 2nd" and "F_RT4 transition 3rd" is determined.

As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 25, which will be described later, various internal winning combinations (code name "R101" (G_RT1 transition lip), code name "R401" (G_RT4 transition)) are used for these internal winning combinations. Lip)) is included. Therefore, if the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "1", "17" to "23", "30", and "31" is determined by the internal lottery, the winning number is determined. Depending on the type, the RT gaming state may shift from the RT3 gaming state to either the RT1 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

(5) Internal lottery table for RT4 FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RT4. The internal lottery table for RT4 is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table for RT4, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "35" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 19 is the inside for RT4. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the internal lottery table for RT4, as shown in FIG. 23, predetermined lottery numbers "1", "8", "9", "24" to "29" and "32" to "35" are drawn respectively. The value is specified. If any of the winning numbers "8", "9", "24" to "29" and "32" to "35" is won, the abbreviations "F_normal lip" and "F_3 continuous don lip" are used as internal winning roles. , "F_3 continuous use middle don lip", "F_reach eye lip 1" to "F_reach eye lip 6" and "F_RT4-2 transition 213" to "F_RT4-2 transition 321" It is determined.

As shown in the internal winning combination determination table of FIG. 25, which will be described later, these internal winning combinations are various transition combinations of RT game states (code name “R101” (G_RT1 transition lip), code name “R201” (G_RT2 transition lip). ) And the code names "R301" to "R311" (G_RT3 transition lip)). Therefore, when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "8", "9", "24" to "29" and "32" to "35" is determined by the internal lottery. May shift the RT gaming state from the RT4 gaming state to any of the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state, depending on the winning type.

As described above, in the RT1 internal lottery table to the RT4 internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" are the internal lottery tables for the general gaming state shown in FIG. The same lottery value as the winning number other than the winning numbers "1" to "35" of RT0) is used. That is, also in the internal lottery table for RT1 to the internal lottery table for RT4, predetermined lottery values are specified for the winning numbers "38" to "40", respectively. If any of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is won, the internal winning combination related to any of the abbreviations "F_middle bell 1" to "F_right middle left bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination. ..

These internal winning combinations include transition combinations (code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure)) that shift the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Therefore, when the RT gaming state is any of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state and any of the winning numbers "38" to "40" is determined by the internal lottery, the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. May move to.

(6) Internal lottery table for CB FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for CB. The internal lottery table for CB is a table referred to when the gaming state is the CB gaming state (MB gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the CB game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "35" and the lottery value is defined.

For example, in the CB game state (MB game state), the probability that the winning number "2" (abbreviated as "F_RT0 lip") is won by referring to the internal lottery table for CB is "8978/65536". Further, in the present embodiment, in the CB (MB) game state, in addition to the winning combination (replaying combination) specified in the internal lottery table for CB, all the small winning combination (CB combination) are also won (FIG. 26, which will be described later). (Refer to the internal winning combination determination table (Part 2)).

Note that FIG. 24 shows an internal lottery table that is referred to when the RT game state is the RT0 state (initial state, etc.) and the CB (MB) is in the winning state (MB is activated). .. However, although not shown here, the internal lottery table for CB is referred to when the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT0 state and the CB (MB) is in a winning state (MB is operating). Will be prepared separately.

Further, as is clear from the various internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 24, in the present embodiment, “missing” occurs in the internal lottery process. Although not shown in FIGS. 19 to 24, the winning number "0" is assigned to the "missing".

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the data pointer is determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The data pointer is data acquired based on the winning number acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is used to specify the internal winning combination defined by the internal winning combination determination table. It is data.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), the internal lottery table in the general gaming state (internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0), internal lottery table for RT1 to RT4). The winning number specified in the internal lottery table) is the value of the data pointer. Therefore, it corresponds to the winning numbers "1" to "35" specified in the internal lottery table in the general game state (internal lottery table for general game state (RT0), internal lottery table for RT1 to internal lottery table for RT4). The values of the data pointers are "1" to "35", respectively. The value of the data pointer corresponding to "off" is also the same as the winning number "0".

On the other hand, when the game state is the bonus state (MB game state), the value obtained by adding "51" to the value of the winning number specified in the internal lottery table for CB becomes the value of the data pointer. Therefore, the values of the data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers "1" to "35" defined in the internal lottery table for CB are "52" to "86", respectively. Further, the value of the data pointer corresponding to "off" is also set to "51" by adding "51" to the winning number "0".

Although not shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, in the "internal winning combination" column in the internal winning combination determination table, not only the code name and abbreviation indicating the internal winning combination but also the display along the valid line is permitted. , Data for identifying the combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is specified. Specifically, the identification data of the "internal winning combination" is represented by a combination of 1-byte data and a storage area, similar to the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 15. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

Further, the "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the winning internal winning combination in the acquired data pointer. When the data pointer is "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "off", which is a combination of all the symbols specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 8 to 15. Indicates that the display of is not permitted.

The internal winning combination determination table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 25 defines the correspondence between the data pointers “1” to “50” and the internal winning combination. That is, in the non-bonus state (non-MB gaming state), when the internal winning combination is determined based on the acquired data pointer, the internal winning combination determination table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 25 is referred to.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the data pointer "2" (corresponding to the winning number "2" in the internal lottery table of FIG. 19) is acquired in the RT0 gaming state, the inside is as shown in FIG. 25. As the winning role, the internal winning role (replay role) related to the code names "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip), "RT01" (G_upper rip), "RB01" (G_lower rip) and "RC01" (G_middle rip) Is a duplicate win.

The internal winning combination determination table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 26 defines the correspondence between the data pointers “51” to “86” and the internal winning combination. That is, in the bonus state (MB game state), when the internal winning combination is determined based on the acquired data pointer, the internal winning combination determination table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 26 is referred to.

Then, in the present embodiment, for example, when the data pointer "53" (corresponding to the winning number "2" in the internal lottery table for CB in FIG. 24) is acquired in the bonus state (MB game state), As shown in FIG. 26, the code names "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip), "RT01" (G_upper lip), "RB01" (G_lower lip) and "RC01" (G_middle lip) are used as internal winning combinations. The internal winning combination (replaying combination) and all the small winning combination (code name "BP01" (G_pushing order failure 1 sheet 1) to "KC07" (G_square cherry 7) internal winning combination) are duplicated.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 28 described later) described later.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines different rotation stop numbers for each data pointer. Specifically, the rotation stop numbers "0" to "86" are associated with the data pointers "0" to "86", respectively. Therefore, for example, when the data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation stop number may be specified for different data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of slip pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table specified in the pull-in priority table described later (see FIG. 34 described later) is specified. It is possible to acquire data regarding the priority of the display combination corresponding to the number.

Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 33 described later) is referred to and is pulled in. The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the priority table selection table number is determined.

For the forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data, specify a stop table (see FIGS. 29 to 31 described later) to be referred to when forward-pressed. It is the data for. In addition, the "forward push" referred to in this specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, " Corresponds to the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular push table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 32 described later) to be referred to when the irregular push is performed. The "irregular push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "middle right / left". Corresponds to the pressing order of "right, middle, left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, for example, in the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state), after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, in the reel on which the stop operation is performed, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. Then, the symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position for stopping the rotation of the reel (this is referred to as "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel is started, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the predetermined reel from the detection of the stop operation for the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the predetermined reel of the display window in the period from the detection of the stop operation for the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the predetermined reel. .. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

With reference to the stop table described later, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the planned stop position of the reel is not immediately determined by the acquired number of sliding pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of sliding pieces more appropriate than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (see FIG. 29 described later) (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) exists. , The number of slip pieces is changed with reference to the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 34 described later) described later. Then, the slip piece number determination data is used to determine the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position 4 or 1 ahead, which is the maximum number of slip pieces. Used.

In this embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the pressing order of the stop buttons for forward pressing and irregular pressing. Specifically, in the case of forward pushing, the first stop table for forward push (see FIG. 29 described later) and the second and third stop tables for forward push (see FIG. 31 described later) will be described later. See) and. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table described later (see FIG. 32 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 29 is a stop table that is referred to when the forward pressing table selection data is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pushing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 30 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. The forward push control change table shown in FIG. 30 is a change table that is referred to when the forward push table change data is "00". The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 29) is "1" and the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second / third stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 31 is referred to when the second / third stop table number for forward pressing is "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position to which it is associated stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the column of "A line" in each stop table, and the column of "B line". Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by allocating information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the column of "line change" in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, it is possible to change the position where the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop position at the time of the first stop or the like. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of slip pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is designated.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether or not "1" is specified as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of slip pieces. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the slip piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 34 described later) described later.

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the column of "first stop of the left reel" in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "01", the attraction priority table number "01" is first acquired. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the pull-in priority table number "01" is maintained thereafter regardless of the reel types of the second stop and the third stop.

Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the target position column in the table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is displayed. Obtained as a pull-in priority table number. For example, when the middle reel 3C is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "00", the attraction priority table number is not registered in the column of the target position corresponding to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "00" is referred to, and "02" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Draw-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "09" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search for the existence of a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority to be stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each fetch data is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 15, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of slip pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward stop (see FIG. 29). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, in the pull-in priority table, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. It is given priority over the stop display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. For example, when the attraction priority table number is "00", the number of priority divisions is 3, and when the attraction priority table number is "09", the number of priority divisions is 2. ..

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority order when the pull-in priority table number is "00" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "1" includes the code names "Z001" to "Z036", "R301" to "R311", "R401", "R201", and "R101". , "R001", "RT01", "RB01" and "RC01" are defined.

When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "2" includes the code names "KB01", "BP01", "BP02", "BF01" to "BF03", "BL01" to "BL03". , "BM01", "BC01", "SG01", "WT01", "WB01", "WU01", "WD01", "WC01", "CC01" and "KC01" to "KC07" It is stipulated. Then, the fetch data corresponding to the code name "MB01" is defined in the priority "3" when the pull-in priority table number is "00".

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. The search order table is an order in which the search order is preferentially applied from a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of slip pieces ("0" to "4" when the maximum number of slip pieces is 4) (hereinafter, "search order"). ) Is specified. The search order table shown in FIG. 35 is a table to be referred to when stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding pieces being four pieces. Further, the search order table shown in FIG. 36 is a table to be referred to when the stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding pieces as one piece (when the number of sliding pieces is determined for at least one reel at the time of MB operation).

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of the numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the slip piece number determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of slip pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order. Further, in the present embodiment, stop control is performed with a maximum number of sliding pieces of 4 for reels other than reels in which the maximum number of sliding pieces is 1 during MB (CB) operation.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 255 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lowest search order "5" (or "2") in the search order table. The numerical value corresponding to the search order "1" is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the valid line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 15).

For example, when the symbol "DON" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 62 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (DON) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data specified in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically ANDed and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 48 described later) described later.

[Game lock lottery table]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the RT0 to RT4 gaming states, when a specific internal winning combination is won, a game lock lottery is performed. Then, when the lottery is won, a predetermined reel effect (game lock) is performed during the reel acceleration processing period. It should be noted that while the game lock is occurring, even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed. The various game lock lottery tables described here are mainly used to determine various patterns of game locks performed during the reel acceleration process.

Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. In this embodiment, a game lock lottery table is provided for each RT game state. The game lock lottery table defines a lottery value of the type (lock number) of the game lock to be won according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in the predetermined RT game state (RT0 to RT4 game state). ..

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (No. 1) referred to in the RT0 game state. The game lock lottery table (1) has winning numbers "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice") and "46" (abbreviation "F_strong ice") to "49". (Abbreviated as "F_chance role"), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is specified.

In the RT0 game state, the winning numbers are "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice"), "47" (abbreviation "F_middle stage che") and "48" (abbreviation "48"). In the case of any of "F_confirmation check"), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotary cylinder effect pattern 2) is selected. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, when the winning number is one of "46" (abbreviated as "F_strong che") and "49" (abbreviated as "F_chance role"), the lock number 0 (normal pattern) and One of the game locks of the lock number 1 (rotating body effect pattern 1) is selected.

The lock number 0 (normal pattern) corresponds to a pattern in which the reels are not locked (normal reel acceleration processing). Further, the lock number 1 (rotating cylinder effect pattern 1) and the lock number 2 (rotating cylinder effect pattern 2) correspond to a lock effect pattern called "short lock".

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (No. 2) referred to in the RT1 game state. The game lock lottery table (No. 2) has a winning number "9" (abbreviation "F_3 continuous use middle don lip"), "24" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 1"), "25" (abbreviation "F_reach eye use"). Lip 2)), "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice") and "46" (abbreviation "F_strong che") to "49" (abbreviation "F_chance eye") In each of the "roles"), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is specified.

In the RT1 game state, the winning numbers are "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice"), "47" (abbreviation "F_middle stage che") and "48" (abbreviation "48"). In the case of any of "F_confirmed check"), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. .. Further, in the RT1 game state, the winning numbers are "24" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 1"), "25" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 2"), "46" (abbreviation "F_strong che"). ) And "49" (abbreviated as "F_chance role"), one of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotational effect pattern 1) is selected. .. Further, in the RT1 game state, when the winning number is "9" (abbreviated as "F_3 continuous use middle donlip"), one of the lock number 0 (normal pattern) and the lock number 3 (rotating body effect pattern 3) is selected. Will be done.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (No. 3) referred to in the RT2 game state. The game lock lottery table (3) has winning numbers "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice") and "46" (abbreviation "F_strong ice") to "49". (Abbreviated as "F_chance role"), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is specified.

In the RT2 game state, the winning numbers are "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice"), "47" (abbreviation "F_middle stage che") and "48" (abbreviation "48"). In the case of any of "F_confirmed check"), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. .. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the winning number is either "46" (abbreviated as "F_strong che") or "49" (abbreviated as "F_chance role"), it is the same as in the RT0 gaming state. , One of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotational effect pattern 1) is selected.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (No. 4) referred to in the RT3 game state. The game lock lottery table (4) has winning numbers "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice") and "46" (abbreviation "F_strong ice") to "49". (Abbreviated as "F_chance role"), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is specified.

In the RT3 game state, the winning numbers are "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice"), "47" (abbreviation "F_middle stage che") and "48" (abbreviation "48"). In the case of any of "F_confirmed check"), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. .. Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when the winning number is either "46" (abbreviated as "F_strong che") or "49" (abbreviated as "F_chance role"), it is the same as in the RT0 gaming state. , One of the game locks of lock number 0 (normal pattern) and lock number 1 (rotational effect pattern 1) is selected.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration of a game lock lottery table (No. 5) referred to in the RT4 game state. The game lock lottery table (No. 5) has the winning numbers "1" (abbreviation "F_normal lip"), "24" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 1"), and "25" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip"). 2 ")," 43 "(abbreviated as" F_strong ice ")," 44 "(abbreviated as" F_strongest ice ") and" 46 "(abbreviated as" F_strong che ") to" 49 "(abbreviated as" F_chance role " ”), The lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 5) is specified.

In the RT4 game state, the winning numbers are "43" (abbreviation "F_strong ice"), "44" (abbreviation "F_strongest ice"), "47" (abbreviation "F_middle stage che") and "48" (abbreviation "48"). In the case of any of "F_confirmed check"), any game lock of lock number 0 (normal pattern) to lock number 2 (rotational effect pattern 2) is selected as in the RT0 game state. .. Further, in the RT4 game state, when the winning number is either "46" (abbreviated as "F_strong che") or "49" (abbreviated as "F_chance role"), the lock number is 0 (normal pattern). And one of the game locks of the lock number 1 (rotating body effect pattern 1) is selected.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, if the winning number is either "24" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 1") or "25" (abbreviation "F_reach eye lip 2"), the lock is performed. The game lock with the number 0 (normal pattern) is selected. Further, in the RT4 game state, when the winning number is "1" (abbreviated as "F_normal lip"), the lock number 0 (normal pattern), the lock number 4 (shift to the next game carnival at the first stop in the middle) and One of the lock numbers 5 (shift to the next game carnival at the first stop on the right) is selected.

The game lock lottery table (No. 5) is not only the game lock lottery table in the ART state (RT4 game state) described later, but also the sub-game state is directly described later without going through the XR (extreme rush) mode game described later. It also serves as a lottery table for whether or not to shift to the XRC (XR Carnival) mode game. Then, in the RT4 game state, when the lock number 4 is won by using the game lock lottery table (No. 5), the sub-game state is described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the middle reel 3C. It is confirmed that the mode will shift to the XRC mode. Further, in the RT4 game state, when the lock number 5 is won by using the game lock lottery table (No. 5), the sub-game state is described later in the next game by performing the first stop of the right reel 3R. It is confirmed that the mode will shift to the XRC mode.

[Lottery table in continuous lock state]
In the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state (ART state described later), when the game of the XRC mode described later is performed, the game lock (continuous lock) is executed a plurality of times during the acceleration period of one reel. Will be done. The lottery table in the continuous lock state described here is used when determining a pattern of continuous lock (number of locks, lock timer, etc.) performed during the period of reel acceleration processing.

The lottery table in the continuous locked state will be described with reference to FIG. 43. This lottery table is referred to in the continuous game lock lottery process in the game lock lottery process described later (see FIG. 244 described later).

The lottery table in the continuous lock state defines the correspondence between the number of remaining lottery (continuous lock number) and the lottery value. If the value of the effect state described later is less than 5, the lottery value in the lottery table during the continuous lock state is doubled.

The remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) is data related to the time set in the lock timer, and although not shown here, when the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) becomes large, the time set in the lock timer is set. Is set to be long. Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of remaining lottery (continuous lock number) increases (when the time set in the lock timer becomes long), the number of additional games of ART in the XRC mode is set to increase (described later). See the XR carnival additional addition table 1 in FIG. 144).

The "lock count" in the XR carnival additional addition table 1 of FIG. 144, which will be described later, is a value obtained by dividing the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) by 2 and rounding down the decimal point of the division result. Therefore, for example, the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) "19" corresponds to the lock count "9".

In the continuous game lock lottery process using the lottery table in the continuous lock state of the present embodiment, first, the random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65536) is selected as the number of remaining lottery times. The lottery value specified corresponding to (continuous lock number) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (a "digit" occurs) in the predetermined remaining lottery number (continuous lock number), it means that the remaining lottery number (continuous lock number) is won.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 49. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, carry-over combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 62 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 62, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of the symbols related to the winning and the combination of the symbols that triggers the transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 44. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 62, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). Further, the carry-over combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the storage area 2 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, when any one of "C_MB1" to "C_MB4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "REP1"-"REP1"-"BEL1" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the valid line. Will be done. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The game state flag storage area is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data, respectively. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the MB is being operated and the game state is the MB game state.

[Activity stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 51 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage areas 2 to 63) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 63.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 37), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 48. When a plurality of valid lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of valid lines are provided. Further, in this case, the effective line may be changed according to the number of BETs or the gaming state.

[Retract priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a draw-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 34) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 35 or FIG. 36).

<Table of Correspondence between Internal Winning Combination and Stop Order> Next, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

FIG. 50 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during non-bonus (non-MB) and the stop order, and corresponds to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of display role to be played. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 50 shows only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

For example, when the data pointer is "2", the code names "R001" (G_RT0 migration lip), "RT01" (G_upper lip), "RB01" (G_lower lip) and "RC01" are used as internal winning combinations. (G_middle rip), the internal winning combination is duplicated (see FIG. 25). In this case, if the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50) or "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50), the code name "RT01" (G_ The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RB01" (G_lower rip) and "RC01" (G_middle rip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 50), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 50), "right and left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 50). ) Or "Right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Reel.

In the present embodiment, in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 50, when the data pointer is any of "17" to "22" and "24" to "29", and the stop button is pressed in the forward order, the data pointer is pressed forward. When the stop button is pressed at the timing when the internal winning combination (replaying combination) described in the column in the corresponding correspondence table (the column in which (*) is described in FIG. 50) cannot be stopped, another replaying combination is played. It is configured to stop.

Further, FIG. 51 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) in the MB and the reel stop order, and is a display corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of role (code name).

For example, when the data pointer is "51", all the small winning combinations are duplicated winning combinations (see FIG. 26). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "BM01" (G_14 bells) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, 14 One medal will be paid out. On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in an order other than "middle left and right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "BL02" (G_15 bells_2) or "BL03" (G_15 bells_3) stops on the effective line. It will be displayed and 15 medals will be paid out.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MB ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14 (see FIG. 16). Therefore, for example, when the data pointer "51" is acquired in the MB, the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" in the first game, and the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "BM01" is used. By displaying the stop on the valid line, it is possible to digest two unit games during the MB, and it is possible to pay out up to 29 medals (the net increase in the number of medals is 23). That is, for example, when the data pointer "51" is acquired during the MB, the reels can be stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213") to obtain such a large medal payout. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the condition that the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "BL01" (G_1 15-sheet bell_1) can be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the MB is that the data pointer is "58". Yes, and only when the reel stop order is "left middle right" (stop order "123"). That is, the internal winning combination related to the code name "BL01" (G_1 15-sheet bell_1) is provided as a so-called "rare combination", thereby suppressing the game in the MB from becoming monotonous.

The "rare role" in the present embodiment means the winning numbers "8", "9", "24", "25", "36", "37", "42" to "Rare" in the non-MB game. It is an internal winning combination of "49" and the winning number "0 (missing)" in the RT2 to RT4 gaming states. Further, in the game in MB, the internal winning combination of the winning numbers "7", "26" and "27" is called "rare role".

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the reel stop order, and the RT shift will be described. FIG. 52 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination (data pointer), the reel stop order, and the RT transition, and the transition destination of the RT gaming state corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Is shown.

For example, when the data pointer is "2" (abbreviated as "Rip for F_RT0"), when the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle" as described with reference to FIG. The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT01" (G_upper rip), "RB01" (G_lower rip) and "RC01" (G_middle rip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Since these display combinations are not transitions to the RT gaming state, the RT gaming state does not shift in this case.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in an order other than "left middle right" and "left and right middle", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "R001" (G_RT0 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Since this display combination is a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 17), in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is "12" (abbreviated as "F_Don-4 transition 2nd") or "13" (abbreviated as "F_Don-4 transition 3rd"), the reel is set to "left middle right" or. When stopped in the order of "left and right middle", among the code names "R301" to "R303" and "R305" to "R306", the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination related to the code name "R302" (G_RT3 migration lip_2) The symbol combination of the combination (internal winning combination related to the BB mode of the pseudo bonus described later) is preferentially stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. At this time, the sub-game state shifts to the BB (Don Red 7) mode of the pseudo bonus described later.

On the other hand, when the data pointer is "14" (abbreviated as "F_RB-4 transition 2nd") or "15" (abbreviated as "F_RB-4 transition 3rd"), the reel is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". When stopped in the order of "middle", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "R302" (G_RT3 transition lip_2) is displayed as stopped with priority on the valid line, and the RT game state is the RT3 game state (individual technique). Pseudo bonus). At this time, the sub-game state shifts to the RB mode of the pseudo bonus described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state, the symbol combination of the transition combination differs depending on the mode type in the pseudo bonus of the transition destination. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game shifts to a different pseudo-bonus game due to the difference in the symbol combination displayed at the time of transitioning to the RT3 game state.

The "reset", "maintenance", and "one-step UP" written in parentheses after "no migration" described in the columns of the data pointers "32" to "35" in the correspondence table of FIG. 52 will be described later. Shows the transition of the locked state of.

Further, in the stop order "312" and "321" columns of the data pointers "17" to "19" and "23" in the correspondence table of FIG. 52, "shift to RT3" is described. Since the data pointer is a data pointer acquired only in the RT3 gaming state, it is substantially "no migration". In addition, even in other data pointers, a transition role (replay role) that triggers a transition to the RT gaming state currently being stayed may be displayed depending on the timing of pressing the stop button. In this case, , In the correspondence table of FIG. 52, it is described as "no transition".

<Game flow>
Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery operation in various RT gaming states and the transition operation between the RT gaming states controlled by the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. Note that FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 51, and FIG. 54 is a table summarizing the activation condition and the end condition of each RT gaming state.

Further, the various code names indicating the transition roles that trigger the transition of the RT gaming state described in FIGS. 53 and 54 correspond to, for example, the code names defined in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 8 to 15. Further, FIG. 53 also describes various gaming states (hereinafter referred to as sub-gaming states) related to the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81).

[Various RT game states]
In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of RT game states, from the RT0 game state to the RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided.

(1) RT0 gaming state The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set in the initial state, and is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is low.

In the RT0 gaming state, a replay role that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, specifically, a replay role related to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 (hereinafter, RT0 transition replay). The lottery is done. In the RT0 game state, when the stop button is pressed irregularly while the RT0 replay is internally won, the symbol combination related to the RT0 replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (winning).

Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may win a prize. In addition, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition) is when the small winning combination related to "Bell", which has one medal payout, cannot be stopped and displayed on the valid line. It is a symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and serves as an opportunity (transition role) to shift to the RT1 gaming state.

(2) RT1 gaming state The RT1 gaming state is an RT gaming state set when the sub-gaming state is the normal state described later, and is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is low.

In the RT1 gaming state, a replay role that triggers the transition to the RT1 gaming state, specifically, a replay role corresponding to the code name "R101" (RT1 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 (hereinafter, RT1 transition). A lottery (called a replay) is performed. At this time, the RT1 transition replay with four push orders is drawn.

Further, in the RT1 gaming state, when the RT1 transition replay with four push orders is internally won, the RT0 transition replay and the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT2 gaming state, specifically, FIGS. 53 and 54. It is set so that the replay combination (hereinafter referred to as RT2 transition replay) corresponding to the code name "R201" (RT2 transition replay) described in the above is duplicated. Then, in a state where the RT1 transition replay, the RT0 transition replay, and the RT2 transition replay with four push orders are duplicated, if an irregular push is performed, the RT0 transition replay or the RT2 transition replay may win a prize.

Further, in the RT1 gaming state, the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT3 gaming state, specifically, the replay corresponding to the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54. In some cases, the role (hereinafter referred to as RT3 transition replay) is won independently (separately from RT1 transition replay). In the RT1 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

Further, in the RT1 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may win a prize. These roles are small roles in which one medal is paid out when the push order is missed due to an irregular push, and the winning of this small role is an opportunity (transition role) to shift to the RT0 gaming state.

(3) RT2 gaming state The RT2 gaming state is an RT gaming state set when the sub-gaming state is a state referred to as "between flags", and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is high.

The RT2 gaming state corresponds to the RT3 transition replay and the replay role that triggers the transition to the RT4 gaming state, specifically, the replay role corresponding to the code name "R401" (RT4 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54. (Hereinafter referred to as RT4 transition replay) is an RT gaming state in which a prize is won (established) with a high probability. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, the RT0 transition replay is also set to overlap in the state where the RT3 transition replay and the RT4 transition replay are internally won. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is other than the predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is incorrect), the RT0 transition replay wins a prize.

Further, in the RT2 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure), which is a small winning combination that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the RT1 gaming state. In some cases, the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition), which serves as a transition opportunity (transition role), wins a prize.

(4) RT3 game state The RT3 game state (first replay time state) is an RT game state set when the sub game state is a pseudo bonus described later, and is a game state with a high probability of winning the replay. ..

The RT3 gaming state is an RT gaming state in which the RT4 transition replay wins (establishes) with a high probability when the pressing order of the stop buttons is a predetermined pressing order (when the pressing order is correct). In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay also overlaps in the state where the RT4 transition replay is internally won. Then, in this case, if the order in which the stop buttons are pressed is incorrect, the RT1 transition replay wins a prize.

Further, in the RT3 gaming state, the internal winning combination (small combination) related to the code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure) that triggers the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the transition to the RT1 gaming state. In some cases, the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition) that serves as an opportunity will win a prize.

(5) RT4 game state The RT4 game state (second replay time state) is an RT game state set when the sub game state is the ART state described later, and is a game state with a high probability of winning the replay. ..

The RT4 game states are the RT1 transition replay (particularly the replay role of the winning number "1" (abbreviation "F_normal rip")) and the RT2 transition replay (particularly the winning number "32" (abbreviation "F_RT4-2 transition 213"). ) To "33" (abbreviated as "F_RT4-2 transition 321") is an RT gaming state that is established (winning) with a high probability.

In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay also overlaps in the state where the RT2 transition replay is internally won. Then, in this case, if the order in which the stop buttons are pressed is incorrect, the RT1 transition replay wins a prize.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT3 transition replay, specifically, the replay combination corresponding to the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may be won independently. be. In the RT4 gaming state, the probability of winning the RT3 transition replay is very low, and the RT3 transition replay is a so-called rare role.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the code names "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure), which are small roles that trigger the transition to the RT0 gaming state, or the transition to the RT1 gaming state. In some cases, the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (abbreviated as "G_RT1 transition") that serves as an opportunity will win a prize.

[Transition flow of RT game state]
Next, the transition flow between the various RT gaming states described above will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the fact that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line is a transition condition between the RT gaming states (invocation of each RT gaming state). Condition and end condition). The transition operation between the RT gaming states is controlled by the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) referring to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) described later.

First, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the initial state (for example, at the time of shipment), or in any of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, the code names are "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (pushing order). When the internal winning combination related to (1 failure) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 54, the end condition of the RT0 gaming state is a stop display of the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state is changed from the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. 53. It shifts to the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 54, the end conditions of the RT1 gaming state are the code names "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "R201" (RT2 transition lip), "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip), and "BP01". "And" BP02 "(one push order failure) is a stop display of the internal winning combination.

Therefore, in the RT1 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one push order failure) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (winning prize). In this case), as shown in FIG. 53, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Further, in the RT1 gaming state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R201" (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT gaming state is changed from the RT1 gaming state to RT2. Move to the game state. Further, in the RT1 game state, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any one of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT game state. Shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 54, the end conditions of the RT2 gaming state are the code names "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip), "R401" (RT4 transition lip), and "KB01". (RT1 transition), "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure), which is a stop display of the internal winning combination.

Therefore, in the RT2 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one push order failure) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (winning prize). In this case), as shown in FIG. 53, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. Further, in the RT2 game state, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT game state. Shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

Further, in the RT2 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R401" (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), as shown in FIG. 53, the RT game state. Shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "KB01" (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 54, the end conditions of the RT3 gaming state are the code names "R101" (RT1 transition lip), "R401" (RT4 transition lip), "KB01" (RT1 transition), "BP01" and "BP02". "(One push order failure) is a stop display of the internal winning combination.

Therefore, in the RT3 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R101" (RT1 transition lip) or "KB01" (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), As shown in FIG. 53, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R401" (RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to RT4. Move to the game state. Further, in the RT3 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "BP01" or "BP02" (one push order failure) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT game state is changed from the RT3 game state to the RT0 game. Move to the state.

As shown in FIG. 54, the end conditions of the RT4 gaming state are the code names "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "R101" (RT1 transition lip), "R201" (RT2 transition lip), "R301" to "R311". (RT3 transition lip), "KB01" (RT1 transition), "BP01" and "BP02" (one push order failure), which is a stop display of the internal winning combination.

Therefore, in the RT4 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R001" (RT0 transition lip), "BP01" or "BP02" (one push order failure) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (winning prize). In this case), as shown in FIG. 53, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, in the RT4 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R101" (RT1 transition lip) or "KB01" (RT1 transition) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 53, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, in the RT4 game state, when the internal winning combination related to the code name "R201" (RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT game state is changed from the RT4 game state to RT2. Move to the game state. Further, in the RT4 game state, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any of the code names "R301" to "R311" (RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (when a prize is won), the RT game state. Shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

<Various sub-game states>
Next, various sub-game states related to the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 (sub-CPU 81) will be described. In the present embodiment, various sub-game states called "normal state", "pseudo-bonus", "ART state" and "BGZ (billy get zone)" are mainly provided as sub-game states. Although the description is omitted here, as described in the flow of various control processes by the sub CPU 81 described later, the sub game states are "ART preparation state", "confirmation screen state", and "pseudo bonus end waiting state". ] Etc. are also provided.

[Normal state]
The normal state is a sub-game state executed when the RT game state is the RT0 game state or the RT1 game state and is a non-ART game state.

In the normal state, a lottery is performed for each game, and when a rare role is won, the sub-game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus. Further, in the normal state, when the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo-bonus reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 1280 games), the winning of the pseudo-bonus (“XBB mode” in this embodiment) is determined. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the transition flow of the RT gaming state in FIG. 53, the RT0 or RT1 gaming state does not directly transition to the RT4 gaming state due to the transition trigger of the display combination or the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-game state does not directly shift from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-game state may be directly shifted from the normal state to the ART state based on the result of the internal lottery (due to the transition trigger of the display combination or the like).

In the present embodiment, when the number of digestion games in the normal state reaches a specific number of ceiling games (the number of XR ceiling games described later), the winning of the XR mode (ART state) is determined, and in this case, , The sub-game state shifts directly from the normal state to the ART state.

Further, in the normal state, a lottery for shifting to the BGZ is performed every game, and if the lottery is won, the sub-game state shifts to the BGZ. In this embodiment, the expectation of transition to BGZ changes according to the number of digestion games in the normal state after the end of the pseudo bonus.

For example, when the number of digestion games is 1 to 100, the number of digestion games is "medium expectation", when the number of digestion games is 181 to 210 or 281 to 310, the number of digestion games is "small", and the number of digestion games is 481 to 510. In some cases, the expectation level for transition to BGZ changes in a pattern such as "low expectation" and "100% winning" when the number of digestion games is 900. The relationship between the number of digested games and the degree of expectation of transition to BGZ is determined in various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 151 to 165 described later) described later. It is stipulated.

The BGZ lottery table is set after the end of the previous pseudo-bonus and is maintained until the end of the next pseudo-bonus. Therefore, during that time, the BGZ lottery table set after the end of the previous pseudo bonus is maintained regardless of whether the sub-game state is the normal state or the ART state.

[ART status]
The ART state (special gaming state) is a sub-gaming state executed during the RT4 gaming state. In this embodiment, 50 games of ART games are played.

In the ART state, a lottery of pseudo-bonus is performed every game as in the normal state, and if the lottery is won, the sub-game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus. Even in the ART state, when the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo-bonus reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games, the winning of the pseudo-bonus is confirmed.

Further, in the ART state, as in the normal state, a lottery for shifting to the BGZ is performed every game, and if the lottery is won, the sub-game state shifts to the BGZ. At this time, the expected degree of transition to BGZ changes according to the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus, as in the normal state.

Further, in the ART state, a plurality of types of game modes are provided, which are more advantageous game states for the player. Specifically, game modes called "XR (extreme rush) mode", "XRC (XR carnival) mode" and "rocket mode" are provided.

In the present embodiment, in a game in an ART state other than the above-mentioned various game modes, when the correct answer is given to a predetermined effect (alternative effect) called "BG (Billy Get) Challenge" (when the BG challenge is successful). ), The sub-game state shifts to the XR mode. In the BG challenge, the player performs an alternative selection operation effect, and the success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined based on the selection result, and the selection operation is performed by the player. Even if it is not selected (when not selected), success or failure of the BG challenge may be decided.

Further, even when the number of digestion games in the ART state reaches a specific number of ceiling games (the number of XR ceiling games described later), the winning of the XR mode is determined.

Further, in the games in the ART state other than the above-mentioned various game modes, when the lottery for shifting to the rocket mode is won, the sub-game state shifts to the rocket mode.

In the ART state, normally, when the lottery for shifting to the XRC mode is won in the game of the XR mode, the sub-game state shifts to the XRC mode, but the sub-game state is the XR mode, although it is a very low probability. In some cases, the mode may be directly shifted to the XRC mode without going through.

The contents of each game of the XR mode, the XRC mode, and the rocket mode will be described below.

(1) XR mode In the game of the XR mode (predetermined mode), the continuous lottery of the XR mode is performed every game, and the first game of the XR mode is determined until the continuous lottery is leaked (becomes non-winning). The predetermined number of basic ART games is added to the number of currently remaining ART games (hereinafter referred to as the number of remaining ART games) for each game. In this embodiment, any of 5, 10, 20 and 30 games is selected as the number of basic ART games.

Further, in the XR mode, a plurality of types of continuation modes (XR continuation mode) having different XR continuation rates (50% to 95%) are provided. If a rare role wins internally in XR mode, there is a 100% chance that it will win continuously regardless of the XR continuation mode, but if a role other than the rare role wins internally, it depends on the XR continuation mode. Therefore, the XR continuation rate is different.

Further, in the XR mode game, when the rare role is won, the number of ART games is additionally added separately from the number of basic ART games described above.

Furthermore, in the XR mode game, a predetermined addition parameter called "combo number" is provided, and when the combo number reaches a specified number (specific combo number), the basic ART game number and the number of ART games associated with the rare winning combination are increased. In addition to the additional addition, an additional addition of the number of ART games will be performed (hereinafter, this privilege is referred to as a combo bonus). In the present embodiment, the number of combos is not only added by 1 for each unit game in the XR mode, but also by 1 when a rare combination is won (addition of the number of combos). That is, if a rare role is internally won in a unit game in the XR mode, the total number of combos will be added by 2.

Further, in the XR mode game, when the number of XR continuous games is 2 or more, an XRC mode transition lottery is performed for each game, and when the lottery is won, the transition to the XRC mode is confirmed. At this time, when the rare combination is internally won, the lottery value of the XRC mode transition lottery is appropriately set so as to be easy to win the XRC mode transition lottery.

As mentioned above, if you win a rare role in a game in XR mode, you will be given the privilege of winning the XR continuation lottery (decision to continue) and adding the number of ART games in the unit game, as well as a combo bonus. The number of combos that specify the conditions for the occurrence of is additionally added (combo addition). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of unit games (the number of digested games) until the number of combos reaches a predetermined number and the combo bonus is generated is reduced, and the combo bonus is likely to occur. That is, in the present embodiment, when a rare role is won in a game in the XR mode, it is possible to affect the form of the additional operation (generation of the combo bonus) of the number of ART games in the subsequent games, and the relationship between the games. It is possible to enhance the sex and improve the interest of the game.

(2) XRC mode In the game of XRC mode (specific mode), as in the XR mode, a continuous lottery of the XRC mode is performed every game, and the number of ART games is increased until the continuous lottery is leaked (becomes a non-winning). , Will be added. However, the additional form of the number of ART games in the XRC mode is different from that in the XR mode.

Specifically, in the game of the XRC mode, the number of ART games is added every game and each time the reel is stopped, and the number of ART games is further added even after the third stop. Then, in the XRC mode, a predetermined effect including a reel action (continuous game lock) is performed in conjunction with the addition operation of the number of ART games.

Specifically, first, the number of ART games to be added is determined each time the reel is stopped, according to the content (number of locks) of the reel action (continuous game lock) determined at the start of the game (when the lever is operated). Ru. Next, by executing the determined reel action during the reel acceleration period, the number of ART games added each time the reel is stopped is notified. Further, at this time, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 is notified of the number of additional games determined according to the content of the reel action.

After that, each time the reel is stopped, the number of additional games determined according to the content of the reel action is added to the number of remaining ART games. At this time, each time the reel is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a specific character appears and performs a predetermined operation), and is determined according to the content of the reel action. The number of additional games added is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Then, after the third stop, an effect (combination effect) that combines the contents of the effect performed for each reel is performed, and the number of ART games corresponding to the combination effect is added to the number of remaining ART games. Further, at this time, the number of ART games added according to the combination effect is also notified to the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, the number of additional ART games corresponding to this combination effect is determined by lottery at the time of lever operation.

Then, when the XRC mode is continued by operating the lever of the next game after the third stop, the number of additional ART games for each reel stop is notified by the reel action described above, the effect for each reel stop, and the number of ART games. The addition process, the combination effect after the third stop, and the addition process of the number of ART games are repeated. In this embodiment, the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed for at least two games from the start of the game in the XRC mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the XRC mode game, a reel action (continuous game lock) is always performed at the start of the game. Therefore, the continuous lottery in the XRC mode is also used in the continuous game lock lottery performed by the main CPU 51 at the start of the game, and when the continuous game lock lottery is won, the continuation of the XRC mode is won.

In the present embodiment, the mode of transition from the ART state to the XRC mode includes a mode of shifting from the ART state to the XRC mode via the XR mode and a mode of directly shifting from the ART state to the XRC mode without going through the XR mode. Is provided.

In the former transition mode, there are two transition modes from the XR mode to the XRC mode. Regarding the transition mode, the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation status management method of the XRC mode described below are described. Will be described in detail in.

Further, in the latter transition mode, as described in the game lock lottery table (No. 5) of FIG. 42, the lock number 4 is won (winning number "1") in the ART state (RT4 game state) and Corresponds to the transition mode to the XRC mode when the middle reel 3C is first stopped, or when the lock number 5 is won (the winning number "1" is won) and the right reel 3R is first stopped. ..

(3) Transition mode to XRC mode and management method of operating status of XRC mode As described above, since reel action is always involved in XRC mode, the transition mode to XRC mode and operation of XRC mode are also performed in the main CPU 51. Manage the situation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, parameters called "effect state (0 to 6)" are set to manage these situations. The value of this effect state is stored in the main RAM 53.

The effect state 0 to the effect state 2 correspond to a state in which the occurrence probabilities of the reel actions provided in the XR mode are different from each other (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock state), and the effect state 2 corresponds to the XRC mode winning state. Then, in this effect state 2, when the value of the effect game counter for managing the number of precursor games in the XRC mode becomes 0, the game in the XRC mode is started.

In the present embodiment, for example, as described in the correspondence table of FIG. 52, the transition between the locked states is determined by the combination of the internal winning combination and the pressing order of the stop button. For example, in the state where the internal winning combination of the winning numbers (data pointers) 32 to 35 is won, the transition form (“reset”, “maintenance” or “one-step UP”) of the locked state differs depending on the reel stop order. .. Then, in the XR mode, when the lock state is reset, the effect state shifts to the effect state 0, and when the lock state is maintained, the effect state is also maintained. Further, when the lock state is raised by one step in the effect state 0, the effect state shifts to the effect state 1, and when the lock state is increased by one step in the effect state 1, the effect state is the effect state 2. Move to. That is, if the lock state can be increased by two steps from the effect state 0, the XRC mode is in the winning state.

Further, the effect state 3 corresponds to the state of the first game in the XRC mode, and the effect state 4 corresponds to the state of the second game in the XRC mode. Since the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed in the effect states 3 and 4, in each of these states, each lottery value specified in the lottery table during the continuous lock state (see FIG. 43) in order to make the continuation rate 100%. Is doubled.

The effect state 5 corresponds to the state after the third game of the XRC mode, and the effect state 6 corresponds to the state of waiting for the end of the XRC mode. Therefore, the effect state 6 is set at the time of lever operation and cleared at the end of the game.

As the transition mode from the XR mode to the XRC mode, the lock state is leveled up from the effect state 0 or 1, and the effect state 2 (the winning state of the XRC mode) is generated (hereinafter, the first transition mode). In the effect state 0 or 1, a mode of directly shifting to the XRC mode (hereinafter referred to as a second transition mode) is provided without raising the level of the locked state.

In the first transition mode, it is necessary to raise the locked state (directing state) one level at a time. Therefore, as explained in the correspondence table of FIG. 52, not only the predetermined internal winning combination is won, but also the stop button is pressed. The sub-game state shifts to the XRC mode only when is pressed in a predetermined push order (when the push order is correct).

Further, in the first transition mode, "2" is set in the value of the effect game counter for managing the number of precursor games in the XRC mode, and the games in the XRC mode are started one after another. In the first transition mode, when the XR mode ends during the precursor game period, the push order for "resetting" the lock state is notified, so that the effect state becomes the effect state 0 during the precursor game period. Therefore, the game in XRC mode may not be started.

On the other hand, since the second transition mode corresponds to the case where the XRC direct transition lottery performed in the XR mode is won, the effect state changes from the effect state 0 or 1 to the effect state 2 without raising the level of the lock state. Transition. In this case, in this embodiment, "1" is set in the value of the effect game counter, and the game in the XRC mode is started from the next game.

In the ART state, the lock number 4 is won and the middle reel 3C is first stopped, or the lock number 5 is won and the right reel 3R is first stopped, and the sub-game state is directly from the ART state to the XRC mode. In the case of shifting to, "2" is set in the effect state, and "2" is set in the value of the effect game counter. Therefore, in this case, the XRC mode games are started one after another from the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the mode of directly shifting from the ART state to the XRC mode and the mode of shifting from the XR mode to the XRC mode by leveling up the locked state serve as a predetermined internal winning combination. It is necessary not only to win, but also to press the stop buttons in a predetermined pressing order (correctly answer the pressing order). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the generation of the reel action (game lock) can be controlled by the sub-control circuit 42 that processes the push order navigation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reel action (game lock) is generated, the correct push order differs depending on the winning type (win content). In the present embodiment, in the state where the XRC mode is won, an effect suggesting whether or not to generate a reel action (an effect suggesting the transition to the XRC mode) is performed, and navigation in the order in which the stop buttons are pressed (navigation in the order in which the stop buttons are pressed). Hereinafter, the push order navigation) is performed, and at this time, the push order of the correct answer to be notified changes according to the winning type. That is, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of correct push orders for generating the XRC mode, which are notified by the push order navigation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not a reel action has occurred (XRC mode has occurred).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation status of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier called the effect state, the reel action (game) is performed by the sub-control circuit 42 without increasing the number of RT states. It is possible to control the occurrence of lock).

In this embodiment, the transition mode to the XRC mode and the operation status of the XRC mode are managed by one identifier called the effect state, but the state corresponding to each value of the above-mentioned effect state is managed by a flag, a counter, or the like, respectively. May be provided and managed individually.

(4) Rocket mode In the rocket mode (special mode), games are played for a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) set in advance, and a pseudo bonus is won with a very high probability during this period. Specifically, in the rocket mode, the winning combination (internal winning combination of winning numbers 24 to 29) related to the "reach eye lip" is won with a high probability. Then, in the pseudo-bonus lottery process in the rocket mode, if the internal winning combination is the "reach eye lip", the pseudo-bonus (described later "BB (Don BB)" mode) is won with a very high probability (see the figure below). See pseudo-bonus shown in 69).

In the rocket mode, the symbol combination related to the internally won "reach eye lip" is stopped and displayed on the judgment line, and when the stock of the pseudo bonus ("BB" mode described later) is confirmed, the pseudo bonus is stocked as 1G continuous stock. To. Then, the stocked pseudo bonuses are collectively released after the rocket mode ends.

In the present embodiment, the winning combination related to the "reach eye lip" is displayed as a stop when the stop button is pressed forward. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the game period in the ART state other than the rocket mode, push order navigation (notification of irregular push) for avoiding the display of the role related to the "reach eye lip" is performed, and during the game period in the rocket mode. Does not perform push order navigation, or notifies the push order in which the role related to the "reach eye lip" is displayed (does not notify the information for avoiding the display of the role related to the "reach eye lip"). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 can control the stop mode of the symbol combination in the game of the rocket mode and the stop mode of the symbol combination in the game of the ART state other than the rocket mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the final game of the rocket mode period, the continuous lottery of the rocket mode is performed, and when the lottery is won, the rocket mode game of a predetermined number of games is performed again. If the pseudo bonus is not won during the period of the rocket mode of a predetermined number of games (when the pseudo bonus is not stocked), the continuation of the rocket mode is confirmed with a 100% probability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a rocket mode capable of stocking a pseudo bonus with an ultra-high probability is provided during the operation period of ART. That is, in the game during the ART period, the player is provided with a very advantageous state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interest of the game during the ART period can be further improved.

[BGZ]
The BGZ (predetermined gaming state) is a chance zone in which the above-mentioned BG challenge occurs with a high probability.

The BGZ game occurs in both the normal state and the ART state. Therefore, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as BGZ in the normal state) after the sub-game state shifts from the normal state to the BGZ is executed in the RT0 or RT1 game state. On the other hand, the game of BGZ (hereinafter referred to as BGZ during ART) after the sub-game state shifts from the ART state to the BGZ is executed in the RT4 game state.

Then, in BGZ during ART, push order navigation is performed. It should be noted that there is a case where the push order navigation is performed even in the normal middle BGZ (when the BGZ mode 2 described later is won).

Further, since the number of ART games is not subtracted during the game of BGZ during ART, when the sub-game state returns to the ART state after the end of BGZ during ART, the number of ART games remaining at the time of transition to BGZ is used. ART games are resumed.

In BGZ, if the internal winning combination (winning numbers 38 to 41) related to the "bell" wins, or if the rare winning combination is won, a BG challenge will occur in the next game. In the BG challenge in this BGZ, the success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined based on the alternative selection operation by the player, and even if the selection operation by the player is not performed ( (When not selected), success or failure of the BG challenge may be determined. When the player performs an alternative selection operation in the BG challenge, one of the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R (see FIGS. 2 and 3) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is used by the player. Perform an effect that lets you select and touch.

If the BG challenge is successful in the normal BGZ, the privilege of confirming the XR mode and ART will be given. In the BGZ, a unit game (game) of a predetermined number of games (7 games in the present embodiment) is usually performed, but in the normal medium BGZ game, the BGZ ends in the game in which the BG challenge is successful. Then, when the BG challenge is successful in the normal BGZ, the sub-game state shifts to the ART state, and the XR mode game is performed.

On the other hand, if the BG challenge is successful in BGZ (Super BGZ) during ART, the privilege of confirming the XR mode is given. Further, in the BGZ during ART, even if the BG challenge is successful, the BGZ does not end, and the BGZ game is played until the predetermined number of games is exhausted. Then, in the BGZ during ART, a privilege (determination of the XR mode) is given for each success of the BG challenge for a predetermined number of games, and the XR mode corresponding to the number of successes is stocked.

In the above-mentioned BGZ during ART, even if the BG challenge is successful at an early stage of the predetermined number of games, the BGZ does not end. You can continue to enjoy it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the BGZ during ART.

Further, in the BGZ during ART, the push order navigation for winning the internal winning combination related to the "bell" is performed, so that the probability of occurrence of the BG challenge is significantly increased as compared with the normal BGZ. In addition, since the player can directly recognize that the probability of occurrence of the BG challenge increases depending on the presence or absence of the push order navigation, there is no fear of causing distrust in the game.

In addition, in the 7th game of BGZ, even if the internal winning role related to "Bell" wins or the rare winning role is won, a BG challenge occurs in the next game (8th game), and BGZ It will be in an extended state.

[Pseudo Bonus]
The pseudo bonus (specific gaming state) is a sub-gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, three game modes are provided in the pseudo bonus. Specifically, three types of "BB mode", "RB mode" and "XBB (extreme BB) mode" are provided. Further, the RB mode is divided into two types, "NRB mode" and "SRB mode".

The pseudo-bonus is performed when the pseudo-bonus lottery process is won in the normal state or the ART state. Further, by this pseudo-bonus lottery process, the winning type (any of BB mode, RB mode, and XBB mode) of the pseudo-bonus is also determined. In the present embodiment, when the RB mode is won in the ART state, the mode shifts to the SRB mode.

In addition, if the ART is won in the game after the sub-game state has changed from the normal state to the pseudo-bonus, the subsequent pseudo-bonus game is the game after the sub-game state has changed from the ART state to the pseudo-bonus. A similar game is played.

The contents of each game mode of the pseudo bonus will be described below.

(1) BB mode In this embodiment, 60 games are played in the BB mode. Then, in the BB mode game, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 22) related to "don alignment (lower alignment, upper alignment, diagonal alignment)" is stopped and displayed on the determination line. When the notification to that effect occurs, the winning of ART and XR modes is confirmed.

It should be noted that the stop display of the symbol combination of the internal winning combination and the notification to that effect related to this "don alignment" are performed when the don alignment permission flag described later is in the on state. Further, in the BB mode, a plurality of types of notification generation forms are prepared, and the player can select a predetermined notification generation form from among them.

Further, in the BB mode game, when the symbol combination of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination of winning number 23) related to the "middle stage don matching (middle don matching)" is stopped and displayed on the determination line, the XBB mode is set to 1G. It is stocked as a continuous stock. Then, after the game in the BB mode is completed, the stock in the XBB mode is released in 1G series.

(2) RB (NRB and SRB) mode In the RB (NRB and SRB) mode games, the end condition is not the number of digestion games, but the push order navigation performed when the role related to "bell" is internally won. It is defined by the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of bell navigation). That is, in the RB mode game, the end condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the RB mode game ends.

In the NRB mode, when the period of stay in the NRB mode reaches a predetermined number of games, the grant of the XR mode (ART) (grant of privilege) is confirmed, and the transition to the SRB mode is also confirmed. Further, in the NRB mode, an additional lottery for the number of bell navigations is performed in each game, and when the rare role is internally won, the additional number of bell navigations is won with a high probability. Then, when the lottery for adding the number of bell navigations is won, the number of bell navigations corresponding to the winning type is added to the number of bell navigations currently remaining.

In the SRB mode, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed for each game, and when the lottery is won, the number of additional games corresponding to the winning type is added to the number of remaining ART games. When the number of games digested (number of staying games) in the SRB mode reaches a specific number of games (when the value of the XR lottery mode in RB described later becomes "2" to "6"), it is predetermined. The number of ART games will be added (excluding the winning combination of "Don Alignment Permission" and "Medium Don Permission"). For example, when the number of staying games in the SRB mode reaches a specific number of games such that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB described later becomes "3", a predetermined number of ART games of 10 or more games is added. (See FIG. 113 below).

Further, in the RB (NRB and SRB) mode, when a specified number of games have been played (when the specified game to be described later is achieved), an XR lottery is performed, and in this embodiment, there is a 100% probability of the XR lottery. Win, and ART also win. Then, the corresponding XR mode is stocked.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the pseudo bonus is the number of times of bell navigation, so that the end condition cannot be directly defined by the number of times the unit game is digested (in the process of digesting a plurality of unit games). Conditions that change in stages) are included. On the other hand, the condition for granting the privilege during the pseudo-bonus period is defined by the number of times the unit game is consumed. In this way, by making the management method of the end condition of the pseudo bonus different from the management method of the privilege grant condition, the following effects can be obtained.

For example, if the ART is won (when the privilege is given) in the game (NRB mode game) after the sub game state shifts from the normal state to the pseudo bonus, the specific game in the subsequent game (SRB mode game). When the number of games is exhausted, a predetermined number of ART games is given as a further privilege. Therefore, for example, in the NRB mode, when the operation related to the end condition of the RB mode, that is, when the privilege is granted without generating the bell navigation (when the ART (XR) is won), after that. In the game (SRB mode game), there is a high probability that a further privilege (additional number of ART games) will be given.

That is, in the RB mode game, the background of winning the ART (XR) (giving a privilege) is important. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to get tired of the game during the game period of the RB mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the RB mode.

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 238.

[Pseudo bonus lottery table]
First, various pseudo-bonus lottery tables will be described. The pseudo-bonus lottery table is used when performing a pseudo-bonus lottery in various sub-game states.

The pseudo-bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type of the pseudo-bonus set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the pseudo-bonus lottery process using the pseudo-bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is put into the pseudo-bonus lottery table. The lottery value of the winning type of the specified pseudo-bonus is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type of the pseudo bonus at that time is winning.

(1) Pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table With reference to FIGS. 55 to 60, various pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) tables used in the pseudo-bonus lottery process in the normal intermediate process (see FIG. 265 described later) described later. explain.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 1). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 1) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "0" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock". FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 2). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 2) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "1" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock". Further, FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 3). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 3) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "2" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock".

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 4). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 4) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "0" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock". FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 5). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 5) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "1" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock". Further, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 6). The pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (No. 6) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "2" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock".

In this embodiment, four types of pseudo-bonus lottery modes (“0” to “3”) in which the types of pseudo-bonus to be won, the winning probability (lottery value), etc. are different from each other are provided, but the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) The table is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is any of "0" to "2". Further, for example, the “non-flag interval” in which the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table as shown in FIG. 55 is referred to means a state in which the pseudo-bonus is not stocked in the current unit game. On the other hand, for example, the "between flags" with which the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table of FIG. 58 is referred to means a state in which the pseudo-bonus is stocked in the current unit game.

Here, the stock types of various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, "normal stock", "priority stock", and "1G continuous stock" are provided as stock types of various game modes. In the "normal stock", various modes (BB, RB, XBB) in the pseudo bonus, XR mode in the ART state, BGZ and the like are stocked. Further, only the XR mode is stocked in the "priority stock". Therefore, in the following, "priority stock" will be referred to as "XR priority stock". Further, in the "1G continuous stock", for example, the pseudo bonus won in the rocket mode is stocked.

Next, the winning type of the pseudo-bonus specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table will be described. In the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table, the winning types of the pseudo-bonus are RB winning (first release), RB winning (later release), red 7BB winning (first release), red 7BB winning (later release), and don BB winning. (First release), Don BB win (post-release), Don BB win (immediate release), XBB1 win (first release), XBB1 win (post-release), XBB1 win (immediate release), XBB2 win (immediate release) and non- Winning is stipulated.

Note that "Red 7BB" and "Don BB" correspond to the pseudo-bonus BB mode, and "XBB1" and "XBB2" correspond to the pseudo-bonus XBB mode. Further, "first release" means that the corresponding pseudo-bonus is stored at the beginning of the normal stock, and in this case, the pseudo-bonus of the "first release" is the first among various game stocks stored in the normal stock. Is executed. "Post-release" means storing the corresponding pseudo-bonus at the end of the normal stock, in this case after the games of the various game stocks already stored in the normal stock have been digested. The "Release" pseudo-bonus is executed. "Immediate release" means that the winning pseudo-bonus will start from the next game.

In addition, the contents of various internal winning combinations specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table are as follows. "Loss 1" corresponds to the case of winning "Loss" during the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. "Wrong Answer 2" corresponds to the case where "Wrong Answer" is won in the RT gaming state other than the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state.

The "normal lip" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "1". "High RT rip" is a replay role other than "normal rip".

The "pushing order bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointers "39" to "41". The "middle bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "38". The "15 bells" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "36".

"Weak ice" is a small role related to "ice" that is internally won by the data pointer "42". "Strong ice" is a small role related to "ice" that is internally won by the data pointer "43". "MB middle role 3" is a role to win internally with the data pointers "53" to "57". "R2 ice" corresponds to the case where the lock number "2" is won and the small winning combination related to "ice" of the data pointer "43" or "44" is internally won.

The "weak cherry" is a small role related to the "cherry" that is internally won by the data pointer "45". The "strong cherry" is a small role related to the "cherry" that is internally won by the data pointer "46". The "middle-tier cherry" is a small role related to the "cherry" that is internally won by the data pointer "47". The "determined cherry" is a small role related to the "cherry" that is internally won by the data pointer "48".

The "chance eye" is a small role that is internally won by the data pointer "49". "MB" is a bonus that is internally won by the data pointer "50". "MB middle role 1" is a role to win internally with the data pointers "51", "52", "59" to "86". "MB middle role 2" is a role to win internally with the data pointer "58".

The "reach eyes rips 1 and 2" are replay roles that are internally won by the data pointers "24" and "25". The "reach eye lip 3, 4, 5" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointers "26" to "28".

"Direct don alignment" is a replay role that wins internally with the data pointer "8". "Middle-stage don alignment" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "9". The "direct middle stage don alignment R3" corresponds to the case where the lock number "3" is won and the replay combination related to the data pointer "9" is internally won.

(2) Pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table Various pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 66. The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table is used for the ART preparation process described later (see FIG. 268 described later), the ART process described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later), and the XR process described later (see FIG. 272 described later). It is used in the pseudo-bonus lottery process during each process of FIGS. 276 to 278) and the process during the XR carnival described later (see FIG. 280 described later).

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 1). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 1) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "0" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock". FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 2). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 2) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "1" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock". Further, FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 3). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (3) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "2" and the pseudo-bonus is "when not in stock".

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 4). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (4) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "0" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock". FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 5). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 5) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "1" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock". Further, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 6). The pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (No. 6) is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "2" and the pseudo-bonus is "at stock".

The configuration of each pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (internal winning combination type and pseudo-bonus winning type) shown in FIGS. 61 to 66 is the pseudo-bonus lottery shown in FIG. 55 and the like, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as that of the (normal) table, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(3) Pseudo-bonus lottery (during confirmation screen) table FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (during confirmation screen) table. The pseudo-bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table is used in the pseudo-bonus lottery processing in the confirmation screen processing (see FIG. 285 described later) described later.

Since the various pseudo-bonus winning types specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (during the confirmation screen) table are the same as those in the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the description of the pseudo-bonus winning type is omitted. do. Further, among the various internal winning combinations specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (during the confirmation screen) table, the ones described in the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 55 and the like are the same except for "RB fake rip". .. The "RB fake rip" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "16".

(4) Pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table. The pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table is used in the pseudo-bonus lottery process in the process of waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus (see FIG. 291 described later).

The various pseudo-bonus winning types specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table are the same as those in the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 55 and the like. Is omitted. In addition, among the various internal winning combinations specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table, except for "don matching permission" and "medium don matching permission", the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) shown in FIG. 55 and the like. ) Same as described in the table. It should be noted that the "don alignment permission" corresponds to the case where the replay combination related to the "don alignment" of the data pointers "20" to "22" is internally won in the state where the don alignment permission is established. Further, the "middle don alignment permission" corresponds to the case where the replay combination related to the "middle don alignment" of the data pointer "23" is internally won in the state where the don alignment permission is established.

(5) Pseudo-bonus lottery (in-rocket) table FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery (in-rocket) table. The pseudo-bonus lottery (in-rocket) table is referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode is "3" in the pseudo-bonus lottery process during the later-described rocket-in-process (see FIGS. 281 and 282 below).

The configuration of the pseudo-bonus lottery (in the rocket) table shown in FIG. 69 (internal winning combination type and pseudo-bonus winning type) is the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 55 or the like, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as that of the above, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

[XR lottery table]
Next, various XR lottery tables will be described. The XR lottery table is used when performing a pseudo bonus lottery in various sub-game states.

(1) XR lottery (normal) table FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (normal) table. The XR lottery (normal) table is used in the XR lottery process during the normal process described later (see FIG. 265 described later).

The XR lottery (normal) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

The XR winning trigger parameter is a parameter for determining the number of ART games added for each unit game in the XR mode and XRC mode games, and the continuation probability of the XR mode and XRC mode games. That is, the XR winning trigger parameter is a parameter for determining the game content of the XR mode and the XRC mode. Specifically, the XR winning trigger parameter is used when determining the game content of the XR mode and the XRC mode in the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 125 described later) described later.

In the XR lottery (normal) table, XR winning trigger parameters 1 to 6 (priority release), XR winning trigger parameters 1 to 4 (post-release), and non-winning are specified as winning types of XR winning trigger parameters. In addition, "priority release" means that the corresponding XR mode is stocked as priority stock.

Further, the contents of the various internal winning combinations specified in the XR lottery (normal) table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the XR lottery (normal) table is omitted.

Here, a case where there is one type of XR lottery processing mode (XR lottery mode) will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of the winning XR winning opportunity parameter and the winning probability (lottery value) are not limited to this. A plurality of types of XR lottery modes in which the like may be different from each other may be provided. In this case, an XR lottery table may be provided for each XR lottery mode.

In the XR lottery process using the XR lottery (normal) table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is put into the XR lottery table. The lottery value for each specified XR winning trigger parameter is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the XR winning trigger parameter at that time is winning.

(2) XR lottery (ART) table Various XR lottery (ART) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. The XR lottery (ART) table shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 is used in the XR lottery process during the ART process described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later).

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR lottery (ART) table (No. 1). The XR lottery (ART) table (No. 1) is referred to in cases other than the XR ceiling game. On the other hand, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (ART) table (No. 2). The XR lottery (ART) table (No. 2) is referred to during the XR ceiling game.

The configuration of each XR lottery (ART) table (internal winning combination type and winning type of XR winning trigger parameter) has the same configuration as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 70, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of XR lottery processing using the XR lottery (ART) table is also the method of XR lottery processing using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (whether or not "digits" have occurred by sequentially subtracting the lottery values. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not, the description thereof will be omitted.

(3) XR lottery (in preparation for ART) table FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (in preparation for ART) table. The XR lottery (ART preparing) table is used in the XR lottery process during the ART preparing process described later (see FIG. 268 described later).

The configuration of the XR lottery (in preparation for ART) table (internal winning combination type and winning type of XR winning trigger parameter) is the same as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 70, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (ART preparing) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and "digits" occur. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it is present, the description thereof will be omitted.

(4) XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table. The XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table is used in the XR lottery process in the process in the confirmation screen (see FIG. 285 described later) described later. The game state "in the confirmation screen" corresponds to the game state in which the pseudo bonus is being prepared.

The configuration of the XR lottery (during the confirmation screen) table (internal winning combination type and winning type of XR winning trigger parameter) has the same configuration as the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 70, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (during the confirmation screen) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (the lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and "digits" occur. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it is present, the description thereof will be omitted.

(5) XR lottery (in BB) table Various XR lottery (in BB) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83. The XR lottery (in BB) table is used in the XR lottery process in the BB process described later (see FIG. 287 described later).

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 1). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 1) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "1". FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 2). The XR lottery (during BB) table (No. 2) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "2". FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 3). The XR lottery (in BB) table (3) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "3". FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 4). The XR lottery (in BB) table (4) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "4". FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 5). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 5) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "5".

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 6). The XR lottery (in BB) table (6) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "6". FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 7). The XR lottery (in BB) table (7) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "7". FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 8). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 8) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "8". FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 9). The XR lottery (in BB) table (No. 9) is referred to when the don alignment mode is "9".

In this embodiment, as described above, nine types of don alignment modes (“1” to “9”) are provided. The value of the don matching mode is determined by the XR lottery game number table in BB described later (see FIGS. 92 to 94 described later).

In the don alignment modes "1" to "9", in the display form of the 3 × 3 symbol formed in the display window of the liquid crystal display device 11, the symbol "DON" is a predetermined line extending from the left reel 3L to the right reel 3R. The types of the above-mentioned modes (hereinafter referred to as "don-matching"), the probability of occurrence of don-matching (lottery value), etc. are different from each other. Then, as the value of the don alignment mode, one of the don alignment disapproval flag, the don alignment permission flag, and the medium don alignment permission flag is set in the BB medium don alignment permission flag lottery table (see FIGS. 97 to 105 described later) described later. Used in making decisions.

Since the winning types of the various XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those in the XR lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 70, the description of the pseudo bonus winning type will be omitted. .. Further, since the various internal winning combinations specified in the XR lottery (in BB) table are the same as those in the pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table shown in FIG. 68, the description of the internal winning combination is also omitted. ..

(6) XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table. The XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table is used in the XR lottery process during the process of waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus described later (see FIG. 291 described later).

The configuration of the XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table (internal winning combination type and winning type of XR winning trigger parameter) is the same as the above-mentioned XR lottery (during BB) table except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of this table configuration is omitted. Further, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the above-mentioned XR lottery (normal) table (lottery values are sequentially subtracted and "digits"". Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not the above has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

(7) XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table With reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, various XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) tables will be described. The XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table is used for the normal processing described later (see FIG. 265 described later), the ART processing described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later), and the ART preparing processing described later (see FIG. 272 described later). 268) and each process in the rocket described later (see FIGS. 281 and 282 described later), it is used in the XR lottery process (at the time of winning the pseudo bonus) performed when the pseudo bonus is won.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table (No. 1). The XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (No. 1) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is "0". FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table (No. 2). The XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (No. 2) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is "1". Further, FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table (No. 3). The XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table (No. 3) is referred to when the pseudo bonus lottery mode is "2".

The XR lottery (at the time of winning a pseudo bonus) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter set for each type of the winning pseudo bonus and the lottery value.

The pseudo-bonus type "RB" specified in the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo-bonus winning) table includes the RB winning (first release) and the RB winning (second-release) specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery table. In addition, the type of pseudo-bonus "BB" specified in the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo-bonus winning) table includes red 7BB winning (first release), red 7BB winning (later release), and don specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery table. BB winning (first release), Don BB winning (post-release) and Don BB winning (immediate release) are included.

In addition, the pseudo-bonus type "XBB1" specified in the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo-bonus winning) table includes XBB1 winning (first release), XBB1 winning (second-release) and XBB1 winning (after-release) specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery table. Immediate release) is included. Further, the pseudo-bonus type "XBB2" includes the XBB2 winning (immediate release) specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery table.

The types of XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning trigger parameter specified in the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo bonus winning) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and "digits" are obtained. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

(8) XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table. The XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the number of staying games in the NRB mode reaches the specified game in the process during NRB described later (see FIG. 288 described later). The specified number of games is the number of staying games when the XR lottery mode in RB is "10" determined by the XR lottery game number table in NRB described later (see FIG. 95 described later) (in RB described later). Corresponds to the value of the XR lottery game number counter).

The XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter and the lottery value.

The types of XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning trigger parameter specified in the XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table is also the XR lottery processing method (lottery value is sequentially subtracted) using the XR lottery (normal) table described above, and "digits". Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not "" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

(9) XR lottery (when the SRB medium-specified game is achieved) table FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery (when the SRB medium-specified game is achieved) table. The XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the number of staying games in the SRB mode reaches the specified game in the SRB process described later (see FIG. 289 described later). The specified number of games is the number of staying games (in RB described later) when the XR lottery mode in RB is determined by the XR lottery game number table in SRB described later (see FIG. 96 described later). Corresponds to the value of the XR lottery game number counter).

The XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter and the lottery value.

The types of XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning trigger parameter specified in the XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table is also the XR lottery processing method (lottery value is sequentially subtracted) using the XR lottery (normal) table described above, and "digits". Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not "" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

(10) XR lottery (when XBB continues) table FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (when XBB continues) table. The XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the continuation of the XBB mode is determined in the XBB intermediate process described later (see FIG. 290 described later).

The XR lottery (when XBB continues) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter set for each type of the XBB continuous lottery winning flag and the lottery value. In this embodiment, two types of XBB continuous lottery winning flags (“1” and “2”) are provided. The XBB continuous lottery winning flags "1" and "2" correspond to the continuation parameters 1 and 2 specified in the XBB continuous lottery table described later (see FIG. 106 described later), respectively.

The types of XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning trigger parameter specified in the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is omitted. Further, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when XBB continues) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and "digits" are generated. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it is present, the description thereof will be omitted.

(11) XR lottery (when BG challenge succeeds) table FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR lottery (when BG challenge succeeds) table. The XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table is used in the XR lottery process performed when the BG challenge is successful (correct answer) in the BGZ (at the time of winning) process (see FIG. 284 described later) described later.

The XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table defines the correspondence between the type of the XR winning trigger parameter set for each success parameter type and the lottery value.

In this embodiment, two types of success parameters (“1” and “2”) are provided. For the success parameter "2", "both correct answers 1: correct answer 1 when not selected" is determined from the contents of various correct answers specified in the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIGS. 166 and 167 described later) described later. Correspond to the case. If the BG challenge is successful with the contents of various other correct answers, "1" is set in the success parameter.

The types of XR winning trigger parameters specified in the XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table are the same as those of the various XR lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of each XR winning trigger parameter specified in the XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table is omitted. In addition, the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table is also the XR lottery processing method using the XR lottery (normal) table described above (lottery values are sequentially subtracted, and "digits" are used. Since it is the same as the method for determining whether or not it has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Table of number of XR lottery games in BB]
Next, the XR lottery game number table in BB will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. The XR lottery game number table in BB sets the don alignment mode (1 to 9) based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the don alignment mode map number in the BB processing (see FIG. 287 described later) described later. Used in making decisions.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery game number table (No. 1) in BB. In the BB medium XR lottery game number table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 92, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don matching mode map number (1 to 43), and the value of the don matching mode are used. Correspondence relationship is stipulated.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery game number table (No. 2) in BB. In the BB medium XR lottery game number table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 93, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don matching mode map number (44 to 86), and the value of the don matching mode are used. Correspondence relationship is stipulated.

Further, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery game number table (No. 3) in BB. In the BB medium XR lottery game number table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 94, the value of the BB remaining game number counter (1 to 60 games), the don matching mode map number (87 to 129), and the value of the don matching mode are used. Correspondence relationship is stipulated.

Number of XR lottery games in BB Number of games listed in the leftmost column of the table (1 to 60 games)
Is the value of the BB remaining game number counter, and the numerical value (1 to 129) described in the column of the top row is the don-matched mode map number. Then, the values (1 to 9) described in the other columns in the XR lottery game number table in BB are the values of the don-matching mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the BB remaining game number counter is 50 and the don-matching mode map number is 15, the don-matching mode “3” is determined (set).

[Table of number of XR lottery games in NRB]
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery game number table in NRB. The NRB medium XR lottery game number table is the RB medium XR lottery mode based on the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter and the RB medium XR lottery table mode in the NRB medium processing described later (see FIG. 288 described later). It is used when determining (0 to 10).

The NRB medium XR lottery game number table includes the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter (1 to 60 games), the RB medium XR lottery table mode (1 to 26), and the value of the RB medium XR lottery mode (0 to 0). The correspondence with 10) is specified.

The number of games (1 to 60 games) listed in the leftmost column in the number of XR lottery games in NRB is the value of the number of games counter for XR lottery in RB, and the number in the top row column is in RB. It is a value (1 to 26) of the XR lottery table mode. Then, the values (0 to 10) described in the other columns in the NRB medium XR lottery game number table are the values of the RB medium XR lottery mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter is 30 and the RB medium XR lottery table mode is 15, the RB medium XR lottery mode “10” is determined (set).

[Table of number of XR lottery games in SRB]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR lottery game number table in SRB. The SRB medium XR lottery game number table is the RB medium XR lottery mode based on the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter and the RB medium XR lottery table mode in the SRB medium process described later (see FIG. 289 described later). It is used when determining (0 to 7).

The SRB medium XR lottery game number table includes the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter (1 to 60 games), the RB medium XR lottery table mode (1 to 28), and the value of the RB medium XR lottery mode (0 to 0). The correspondence with 7) is stipulated. The XR lottery table mode (1 to 28) in RB corresponds to the ART lottery game number table number (1 to 28) defined in the ART lottery game number table lottery table at the start of SRB shown in FIG. 118, which will be described later.

The number of games (1 to 60 games) listed in the leftmost column in the number of XR lottery games in SRB is the value of the number of games counter for XR lottery in RB, and the number in the top row column is in RB. It is a value (1 to 28) of the XR lottery table mode. Then, the values (0 to 7) described in the other columns in the SRB medium XR lottery game number table are the values of the RB medium XR lottery mode. Therefore, for example, if the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter is 30 and the RB medium XR lottery table mode is 15, the RB medium XR lottery mode “1” is determined (set).

[B BB medium don matching permission flag table]
Next, the BB middle don alignment permission flag table will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The BB middle don alignment permission flag table is used when determining the don alignment permission (medium don alignment permission) flag or the disapproval flag in the don alignment permission flag lottery processing in the BB middle processing (see FIG. 287 described later) described later. Used. In this embodiment, a BB middle don alignment permission flag table is separately provided for each don alignment mode.

FIGS. 97 to 105 show the configuration of the BB middle don alignment permission flag table when the current don alignment modes are 1 to 9, respectively.

The BB middle don matching permission flag table is set for each type of "don matching role" that was internally won, and the winning types of "don matching disapproval", "don matching permission", and "medium don matching permission", and their types. Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

In the don alignment permission flag lottery process using the don alignment permission flag table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. The lottery value for each winning type specified in the BB middle don matching permission flag table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, if the current don alignment mode is "2" and the internal winning don alignment combination is "upper alignment", there is a probability of 31088/32768 that "don alignment disallowance" is determined and 1680/32768. "Don match permission" is decided with the probability of.

[XBB continuous lottery table]
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XBB continuous lottery table. The XBB continuous lottery table is used in determining whether to win or not to continue the XBB mode in the XBB continuous lottery process during the XBB intermediate process described later (see FIG. 290 described later).

The XBB continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning types of continuation of the XBB mode set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value.

If the winning type "continuation parameter 1" or "continuation parameter 2" specified in the XBB continuation lottery table is determined, it means that the continuation of the XBB mode has been won.

In addition, the contents of the internal winning combination specified in the XBB continuous lottery table are as follows. "Don fake lower row" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "17". "Don fake upper stage" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "18". "Don fake triten" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "19".

In addition, the "don't-matched lower row" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "20". The "Don's match upper row" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "21". "Don fake diagonal" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "22". And, "Don's match middle stage" is a replay role that wins internally in the data pointer "23".

In the XBB continuous lottery process using the XBB continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is input to the XBB continuous lottery table. The lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "Don's alignment lower stage", the "continuation parameter 1" is won with a probability of 16384/32768, and the continuation of the XBB mode is determined.

[XBB stock table when XBB continues]
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XBB stock table during XBB continuation. The XBB continuous XBB stock table is used to determine the winning / non-winning of the stock in the XBB mode in the XBB continuous XBB stock lottery process during the XBB intermediate process described later (see FIG. 290 described later).

The XBB stock table at the time of XBB continuation defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning type of the stock in the XBB mode and the lottery value set for each type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuous lottery winning flag. The XBB continuous lottery winning flags 1 and 2 correspond to the continuation parameters 1 and 2 specified in the XBB continuous lottery table of FIG. 106, respectively.

In the XBB continuous XBB stock lottery process using the XBB continuous XBB stock table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. At the time of XBB continuation In the XBB stock table, the lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, if the XBB continuous lottery winning flag 1 is set, there is a 100% probability that the stock in the XBB mode will not be won, and if the XBB continuous lottery winning flag 2 is set, there is a 100% probability. The stock in XBB mode wins.

[Continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the configuration of a continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB. The continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB determines the number of stocks (including non-winning) in the XBB mode in the continuous stock lottery process (normal) during XBB during the XBB process described later (see FIG. 290 described later). Used when.

The XBB stock table during XBB continuation corresponds to the types of various stock numbers (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3 and 5) in the XBB mode set for each type of internal winning combination and their lottery values. Define the relationship. The type of the internal winning combination specified in the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of internal winning combination specified in the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB is omitted.

In the continuous stock lottery process during XBB (normal) using the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random numbers are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values for each number of stocks in the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of stocks at that time has been won.

For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 21782/32768 to win 1 stock, a probability of 10922/32768 to win 2 stocks, and a probability of 64/32768 to win 3 stocks. do.

[NRB middle navigation extra lottery table]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for adding a navigation system in NRB. The NRB medium navigation addition lottery table is used when determining the number of additional bell navigation numbers (including non-winning) in the NRB medium bell navigation number addition lottery process in the NRB medium processing (see FIG. 288 described later) described later.

The NRB middle navigation additional lottery table is set for each type of internal winning combination, and is the type of additional number of bell navigation times (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 20) and its lottery value. Prescribe the correspondence with. In addition, the type of the internal winning combination specified in the NRB middle navigation addition lottery table is the same as that of the above-mentioned XR lottery (in BB) table. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the NRB middle navigation addition lottery table is omitted.

In the NRB medium bell navigation number addition lottery process using the NRB medium navigation addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. In the NRB middle bell navigation number addition lottery process, the lottery value for each addition number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additions at that time is won.

For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 28672/32768 to win two Bell Navi additions, and a 39768/32768 probability of winning three Bell Navi additions, 96/32768. There is a probability of winning 5 Bell Navi additions, and a probability of 32/32768 winning 10 Bell Navi additions.

[NRB forced shortening lottery table]
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration of an NRB forced shortening lottery table. The NRB forced shortening lottery table is used to determine the winning / non-winning of the forced shortening of the specified number of games in the NRB medium specified number of games forced transition lottery processing in the NRB intermediate processing (see FIG. 288 described later) described later. ..

The NRB forced shortening lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning or non-winning) of the forced shortening of the specified number of games set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value. The type of internal winning combination specified in the NRB forced shortening lottery table is the same as that of the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of internal winning combination specified in the NRB forced shortening lottery table will be omitted.

In the NRB forcible number of games forced transition lottery process using the NRB forced shortening lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , NRB forced shortening lottery table, the lottery value for each winning type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 3276/32768 that the forced shortening of the specified number of games is non-winning, and a probability of 4/32768 that the forced shortening of the specified number of games is winning.

[Additional lottery table for the number of games during SRB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 117, a lottery table for adding the number of games in various SRBs will be described. The SRB game number addition lottery table is used to determine the number of ART games to be added (including non-winning) in the ART game number addition lottery process in the SRB process (see FIG. 289 described later) described later. ..

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 1) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 1. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 2) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 2. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 3) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 3. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 4) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 4. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 5) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 5. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 6) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 6. Then, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table (No. 7) for adding the number of games in SRB, which is referred to when the XR lottery mode in RB is 7.

The lottery table for adding the number of games during SRB is set for each type of internal winning combination, and the number of adding ART games (0 (non-winning), 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50. , 100, 200, 300) and the corresponding relationship with the lottery value are defined. The type of the internal winning combination specified in the lottery table for adding the number of games in SRB is the same as that in the XR lottery (in BB) table described above. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the lottery table for adding the number of games during SRB will be omitted.

In the ART game number addition lottery process using the SRB medium game number addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. In the SRB game number addition lottery table, the lottery value for each addition number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additions at that time is won.

For example, if the XR lottery mode in RB is 1 and the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 31744/32768 to win the ART addition of 20 games, and a probability of 768/32768 is 30. Win an ART addition for a game, win an ART addition for 50 games with a probability of 224/32768, and win an ART addition for 100 games with a probability of 32/32768.

[ART lottery game number table at SRB start lottery table]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery game number table lottery table at the start of SRB. SRB start ART lottery game number table The lottery table is used in the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process during the NRB process (see FIG. 288 described later) and the SRB process (see FIG. 289 described later) described later. , Used when determining the table number.

SRB start ART lottery game number table The lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of table numbers (1 to 28) set for each type of the transition process to the SRB mode and the lottery values. The table numbers (1 to 28) correspond to the XR lottery table mode (1 to 28) in RB defined in the XR lottery game number table in SRB in FIG. 96.

SRB start ART lottery game number table In the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery process using the lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each table number in the lottery table of the ART lottery game number table at the start of SRB. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the table number at that time is won.

For example, when the process of transition to SRB mode is "transition from NRB", table number 1 or 2 wins with a probability of 8192/32768, and table number 3 or 4 wins with a probability of 3200/32768. Table number 5 or 6 wins with a probability of 2048/32768, and table number 7 or 8 wins with a probability of 1024/32768. Further, in this case, any of the table numbers 9 to 12 is won with the probability of 512/32768, any of the table numbers 13 to 16 is won with the probability of 256/32768, and the table number 17 is won with the probability of 128/32768. Any of 20 to 20 wins, and any of table numbers 21 to 24 wins with a probability of 64/32768.

[Pseudo bonus lottery mode transition table]
Next, various pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. The pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table includes a normal processing described later (see FIG. 265 described later), an ART preparing process described later (see FIG. 268 described later), and an ART processing process described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later). , The board lottery mode of the migration destination is determined in the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition processing during each of the XR processing (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later) and the XRC processing (see FIG. 280 described later) described later. It is used when doing.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (No. 1) referred to when the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode is 0. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (No. 2) referred to when the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode is 1. Then, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (No. 3) referred to when the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode is 2.

The pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table defines the correspondence between the types (0, 1, and 2) of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the transition destination set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table is omitted.

In the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is simulated. In the bonus lottery mode transition table, the lottery value for each type of the pseudo bonus lottery mode of the transition destination is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the type of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the migration destination at that time is won.

For example, if the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode is 0 and the internal winning combination is the "push order bell", there is a probability of 32438/32768 to win the transition to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 0 (no transition). There is a probability of 328/32768 to shift to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 1, and a probability of 2/32768 to win the transition to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 2.

[Pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table]
Next, various pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. The pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table determines the board lottery mode of the transition destination in the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition processing during the pseudo-bonus end (at the time of winning) processing (see FIG. 292 described later) described later. It is used when doing.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table (No. 1) referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo-bonus is 0. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of pseudo-bonus) table (No. 2) referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo-bonus is 1. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table (No. 3) referred to when the pseudo-bonus lottery mode at the end of the pseudo-bonus is 2.

The pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table shows the types (0, 1, and 2) of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the transition destination set for each pseudo-bonus end type (RB end or BB end) and their. Define the correspondence with the lottery value.

In the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition process using the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the transfer destination in each pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the type of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the migration destination at that time is won.

For example, if the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode is 0 and the pseudo-bonus end type is "BB end", there is a probability of 16384/32768 to win the transition to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 0 (no transition). There is a probability of 16302/32768 to shift to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 1, and a probability of 82/32768 to win the transition to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode 2.

[XR content lottery table]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR content lottery table. The XR content lottery table is used for NRB processing described later (see FIG. 288 described later), SRB processing described later (see FIG. 289 described later), XBB processing described later (see FIG. 290 described later), and BGZ processing described later (see FIG. 290 described later). In the XR content lottery process during each process (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 284 described later), the content of the game performed in the XR mode (the number of basic ART games and the XR continuation rate added for each continuation) is determined ( Used when making a tentative decision).

The XR content lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of game content (including non-winning) in the XR mode set for each type of the XR winning trigger parameter (1 to 6) and the lottery value. The parameters 1 to 6 specified in the XR content lottery table correspond to the XR winning trigger parameters 1 to 6, respectively.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, 12 types of XR mode game contents are provided. Specifically, as the game content of the XR mode, the XR basic mode in which the number of ART basic games added for each continuation (hereinafter referred to as the number of XR basic games) is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 50%. A mode in which the number of games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 60%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 70%, and the number of XR basic games is 5 games and XR continuation. A mode in which the rate is 80%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 90%, and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 95%. It will be provided.

Further, as the game contents of the XR mode, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 50%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 60%, and XR A mode in which the number of basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 70%, a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 80%, and the number of XR basic games is 10 games and XR. A mode in which the continuation rate is 90% and a mode in which the number of XR basic games is 10 games and the XR continuation rate is 95% are provided.

In the XR content lottery process using the XR content lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is input to the XR content lottery table. The lottery value for each game content in the XR mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the game content of the XR mode at that time is won.

For example, when the XR winning trigger parameter is "1", there is a probability of 25600/32768 that the number of XR basic games is 5 and the XR continuation rate is 50%. There is a probability that the mode has 5 XR basic games and the XR continuation rate is 60%, or the mode has 5 XR basic games and the XR continuation rate is 70%. Further, in this case, the mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 80% is won with a probability of 960/32768, and the number of XR basic games is 5 games with a probability of 32/32768. It corresponds to the mode in which the XR continuation rate is 90% or the mode in which the number of XR basic games is 5 games and the XR continuation rate is 95%.

[XR basic G number lottery table]
Next, various XR basic G number lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. The XR basic G number lottery table redetermines the number of XR basic games based on the internal winning combination in the XR basic G number lottery process in the XR intermediate process described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later). ) Is used.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR basic G number lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the initial XR basic game number is 5. Further, FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR basic G number lottery table (No. 2) referred to when the initial XR basic game number is 10.

The "initial number of XR basic games" is the number of XR basic games (5 or 10) determined by the XR content lottery process using the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 125. Further, in the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, the number of XR basic games is changed, but the XR continuation rate is not changed.

The XR basic G number lottery table defines the correspondence between the changed types of XR basic games (5, 10, 20 and 30) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the XR basic G number lottery table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the XR basic G number lottery table is omitted.

In the XR basic G number lottery process using the XR basic G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is converted into XR. In the basic G number lottery table, the lottery value for each type of XR basic game number is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of XR basic games at that time is won.

For example, if the initial number of XR basic games is 5, and the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell", the number of XR basic games (no change) of 5 games is won with a probability of 32416/32768, and 320 / With a probability of 32768, the number of XR basic games of 10 games is won, and with a probability of 16/3276, the number of XR basic games of 20 games or 30 games is won.

[XR additional table]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR additional addition table. The XR additional addition table is used when determining the number of ART additional games based on the internal winning combination in the additional addition lottery process for adding the number of Gs in XR during the XR processing described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later). Be done.

The XR additional addition table includes the types of additional games (0 (no additional), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300 and 333) set for each internal winning combination. , The correspondence with the lottery value is specified. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the XR additional addition table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the XR additional addition table is omitted.

In the G number addition addition lottery process in XR using the XR addition addition table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is converted into XR. In the additional addition table, the lottery value for each type of the number of additional games is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

For example, if the internal winning combination is "pushing order bell", there is a probability of 3276/32768 that the winning is won without the number of additional games, and a probability of 2/32768 is that the winning combination is 100 games and the number of additional games is 1/32768. With the probability of winning the number of additional games of 200 games or 300 games.

[Combo bonus lottery table]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of a combo bonus lottery table. The combo bonus lottery table is used when determining the number of ART games to be added by the combo bonus in the combo time addition G number lottery processing in the XR processing (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later) described later.

The combo bonus lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of additional games (0 (no additional), 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 and 100) set for each specific combo number and the lottery value. do. The "specific combo number" is the number of combos that triggers the generation of the combo bonus. In this embodiment, the types of the specific combo number are 5 combos, 7 combos, 10 combos, 15 combos, 20 combos, and 25 combos. Set 7 types of combo and 30 combo.

Combo bonus In the additional G number lottery process at the time of combo using the lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is combined with the combo bonus. In the lottery table, the lottery value for each type of additional games is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

For example, if the number of combos reaches 20 and a combo bonus is generated, there is a probability of 30720/32768 to win an additional 20 games, a probability of 1920/32768 to win an additional 30 games, and a probability of 64/32768. Win 50 games or 100 games.

[XR continuous lottery table]
Next, various XR continuous lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 136. The XR continuous lottery table is used when determining the winning / non-winning of the continuation of the XR mode in the XR continuous lottery processing during the XR intermediate processing described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later).

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 1. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (No. 2) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 2. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR continuation lottery table (No. 3) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 3. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR continuation lottery table (No. 4) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 4. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR continuation lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 5. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR continuation lottery table (No. 6) referred to when the XR continuation mode is 6. Then, FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR continuation lottery table (No. 7) referred to when the discontinuation flag of XR is set.

The XR continuation modes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 have XR continuation rates of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90 shown in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 125, respectively. It corresponds to% and 95% modes.

The XR continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the continuation of the XR mode set for each internal winning combination (rare combination or other than rare combination) and the lottery value.

In the XR continuous lottery process using the XR continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is input to the XR continuous lottery table. The lottery value for each winning type of XR continuation is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, if the XR continuation mode is 2 and the internal winning combination is "other than the rare role", there is a probability of winning the XR continuation in 19162/32768, the XR continuation mode is 2, and the internal winning combination is ". In the case of "rare role", there is a 100% chance that XR continuation will be won. As is clear from this, when the XR continuation mode is 2 (corresponding to the mode with an XR continuation rate of 60%), the winning probability of XR continuation is not uniformly 60% regardless of the internal winning combination. It changes according to the type of internal winning combination. Therefore, the XR continuation rate described in the XR content lottery table shown in FIG. 125 shows the difference in the winning probability of XR continuation according to the type of the internal winning combination, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (rare role), and the like. It is the continuation probability of the average XR calculated in consideration.

[XR ceiling mode transition lottery table]
Next, various XR ceiling mode transition lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table includes NRB processing described later (see FIG. 288 described later), SRB processing described later (see FIG. 289 described later), XBB processing described later (see FIG. 290 described later), and ART described later. The XR ceiling mode of the transition destination is determined in the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process during each of the intermediate processes (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) and the BGZ (at the time of winning) process described later (see FIG. 284 described later). It is used when doing.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the XR mode is won in a game other than the XR ceiling game. Further, FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a configuration of an XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (No. 2) referred to when the XR mode is won in the XR ceiling game.

The XR ceiling mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the transition destination XR ceiling mode set for each type of the current XR ceiling mode and the lottery value. In this embodiment, eight types of XR ceiling modes 0 to 7 are provided as the XR ceiling modes. Between 0 and 7 of the XR ceiling modes, in the various winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and addition value table type) specified in the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table described later with reference to FIG. 139, the winning type and the winning type thereof. Winning probabilities are different from each other.

In the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process using the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is converted into an XR. In the ceiling mode transition lottery table, the lottery value for each type of the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of the XR ceiling mode of the transition destination at that time has been won.

For example, if the XR mode wins in a game other than the ceiling game in the XR mode and the current XR ceiling mode is 0, there is a probability of 4096/32768 that the transition to the XR ceiling mode 1 is won, and 12288. There is a probability of / 32768 that the transition to XR ceiling mode 2 is successful, a probability of 14336/32768 is that of transition to XR ceiling mode 3, and a probability of 2048/32768 is that the transition to XR ceiling mode 4 is successful.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table]
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table is used when determining the XR ceiling basic game number and the addition value table type in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 during the ART process (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) described later. Used.

The XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table defines the correspondence between the types of various winning contents (XR ceiling basic game number and addition value table type) set for each type of XR ceiling mode and the lottery value. In this embodiment, there are 15 types of XR ceiling basic game numbers: 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300, 400 and 500 games. Is provided. Further, as the addition value table type, two types of addition value table 1 and addition value table 2 are provided. This addition value table type is used when determining the addition value of the number of XR ceiling games by using the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table described later with reference to FIG. 140.

In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , XR Number of ceiling games Lottery 1 In the table, the lottery value for each type of winning content is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is winning.

For example, when the XR ceiling mode is "2", there is a probability of 64/32768, whichever is "10 basic ceiling games, 1 additional value table" to "90 basic ceiling games, 1 additional value table". Wins, and with a probability of 3072/32768, any one of "100 ceiling basic games, additional value table 2" to "400 basic ceiling games, additional value table 2" wins, and with a probability of 19840/32768, The winning content of "500 basic ceiling games, additional value table 2" is won.

[XR ceiling game number lottery 2 tables]
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table. The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table is used when determining the addition value of the XR ceiling game number in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 during the ART in-process (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) described later.

The XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table defines the correspondence between the types of various addition values (number of addition games) set for each addition value table type and the lottery value. In this embodiment, the added value (number of added games) is any of 1 to 100 games.

In the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 using the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , XR Ceiling game number lottery 2 In the table, the lottery value for each type of addition value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the added value at that time is won.

For example, when the addition value table type is the addition value table 1, the addition value 1 is won with the probability of 3284/32768, and any of the addition values 2 to 10 is won with the probability of 3276/32768.

[XR Carnival direct migration lottery (during ART) table]
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR carnival direct transition lottery (during ART) table. The XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery (during ART) table is a replay referred to as "Carnival Direct Transition Lip" in the XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery Process (during ART) during the ART process described below (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described below). When the winning combination is an internal winning combination, it is used to determine the winning / non-winning of the direct transfer of the XR Carnival based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, the case where the replay role called "Carnival Direct Transition Lip" is internally won is the case where the winning number "1" (F_normal rip) is won and the lock number 4 or 5 is won in the RT4 game state. Corresponds to.

The XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery (during ART) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning types of the XR Carnival Direct Transition and the lottery value.

In the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during ART) using the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values for each winning type (winning / non-winning) of the XR carnival direct transfer in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during ART) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, when the replay combination called "Carnival Direct Transition Lip" is internally won, the XR Carnival Direct Transition is not won with a probability of 10923/32768, and 21845/32768. With the probability of, the direct transition to the XR Carnival will be a win.

[XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery (During XR) Table]
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the configuration of an XR carnival direct transition lottery (during XR) table. The XR carnival direct transition lottery (during XR) table is based on the presence or absence of an XRC mode reservation in the XR carnival direct transition lottery process (during XR) during the later XR process (see FIGS. 276-278 described below). , XR Carnival Used to determine the winning and non-winning of direct transition.

The case where the XRC mode is reserved here means the case where the XRC mode is stocked, and more specifically, the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, is used. In the XR carnival transition lottery process (during XR), it corresponds to the case where the transition to the XRC mode is won.

The XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery (During XR) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning types of the XR Carnival Direct Transition set for each with and without reservation of the XR Carnival and the lottery value.

In the XR carnival direct transfer lottery process (during XR) using the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during XR) table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values for each winning type (winning / non-winning) of the XR carnival direct transfer in the XR carnival direct transfer lottery (during XR) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142, in the case of "with carnival reservation", there is a 100% probability that the direct transfer to the XR carnival will be a win. On the other hand, in the case of "no carnival reservation", the probability of direct transfer to XR carnival is 8192/32768, and the probability of direct transfer to XR carnival is 24576/32768.

[XR Carnival Transition Lottery (During XR) Table]
FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table. The XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table is transferred to the XRC mode based on the internal winning combination in the XR carnival transition lottery process (during XR) during the XR process described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later). It is used to determine the winning and non-winning of the transition.

The XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the XR carnival transition set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of internal winning combination specified in the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table is omitted.

In the XR carnival transition lottery process (during XR) using the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random numbers are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values for each winning type in the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 29488/32768 for non-winning the XR carnival transition and a probability of 3280/32768 for the XR carnival transition.

[XR Carnival additional 1 lottery table]
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table. The XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table is used when determining the number of additional ART additional games based on the number of locks in the XR carnival additional addition G number lottery 1 processing during the XRC intermediate processing (see FIG. 280 described later). Used.

The XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the number of additional games set for each type of the number of locks and the lottery value.

In this embodiment, 10 types of "0" to "9" are provided as the types of the number of locks. As described above, the lock count is a value calculated based on the remaining lottery count (continuous lock number) defined in the lottery table during the continuous lock state shown in FIG. 43. Further, in the present embodiment, 11 of 0 (no addition), 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 105, 120, 135 and 150 games are used as the type of the number of additional additional games of ART based on the number of locks. Set the type.

In the XR carnival additional G number lottery 1 process using the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the number of additional games in the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is winning.

For example, if the number of locks is "2", there is a 100% chance of winning an additional 30 games.

The number of additional games specified in the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table is the total number of ART games added for each reel stop trigger. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing the number of additional additional games by 3 is the number of games notified by the reel action at the start of the game, and is also the number of additional games notified and added each time the reel is stopped.

[XR Carnival additional 2 lottery table]
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the configuration of the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table. The XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table is used when determining the number of ART additional addition games based on the internal winning combination in the XR carnival medium addition G number lottery 2 processing during the XRC intermediate processing (see FIG. 280 described later). Used for.

The XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of additional games set for each type of internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In addition, the type of the internal winning combination specified in the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the type of internal winning combination specified in the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, 12 types of 0 (no addition), 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300 and 333 games are provided as the types of the number of additional games to be added to ART. ..

In the XR carnival additional G number lottery 2 process using the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of the number of additional games in the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of the winning content at that time is winning.

For example, if the internal winning combination is "strong ice", there is a probability of 26624/32768 to win an additional 50 games, and a probability of 4096/3276 to win an additional 100 games to win 2048/32768. There is a probability that you will win an additional 200 games.

The number of additional games specified in the XR carnival additional additional 2 lottery table is the number of ART additional games notified and added after the third stop. Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, the effect content at the time of stopping each reel and the effect content at the time of the third stop (at the time of stopping each reel) are based on the number of additional games determined by the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table. The combination of the contents of the production) is decided.

[Rocket mode transition lottery table]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a configuration of a rocket mode transition lottery table. The rocket mode transition lottery table determines the winning / non-winning of the transition to the rocket mode based on the internal winning combination in the rocket mode transition lottery processing during the ART in-process (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) described later. Used when doing.

The rocket mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning types of the transition to the rocket mode and the lottery value set for each internal winning combination. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the rocket mode transition lottery table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the rocket mode transition lottery table is omitted.

In the rocket mode transition lottery process using the rocket mode transition lottery table, first, the random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is transferred to the rocket mode. In the lottery table, the lottery value for each winning type (winning / non-winning) of the transition to the rocket mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, when the winning combination related to "Wrong Answer 2" in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is internally won, there is a probability of 8192/32768 to shift to the rocket mode. It will be a win. That is, in the present embodiment, the internal winning combination related to "Wrong Answer 2" in the ART state (RT4 gaming state) is treated as a rare combination.

[Rocket mode continuous lottery table]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the configuration of a rocket mode continuous lottery table. The rocket mode transition lottery table is the continuation / termination of the rocket mode based on the stock status of the pseudo bonus in the rocket mode in the rocket mode continuous lottery processing during the rocket mode processing (see FIGS. 281 and 282 described later) described later. Is used in determining. There are three types of pseudo-bonus stock status: "without stock", "with stock", and "stock winning G" (pseudo-bonus stock winning game).

The rocket mode continuation lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of continuation / termination of the rocket mode and the lottery value set for each stock status of the pseudo bonus.

In the rocket mode continuous lottery process using the rocket mode continuous lottery table, first, the random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is continuously selected in the rocket mode. In the lottery table, the lottery value for each type of continuation / end of rocket mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type at that time is winning.

For example, if the stock status of the pseudo bonus in rocket mode is "no stock", there is a 100% chance that the rocket mode will continue. Further, for example, when the stock status of the pseudo bonus in the rocket mode is "stocked", the end of the rocket mode is won with a probability of 32604/32768, and the continuation of the rocket mode is won with a probability of 164/32768. do.

[Loop lottery table at the end of ART]
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a configuration of a loop lottery table at the end of ART. The ART end loop lottery table is used when determining the return type (including the ART end) after the ART end in the ART end loop lottery process during the ART in-process (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) described later. Used.

The loop lottery table at the end of ART defines the correspondence between the ART return type (including the end of ART) after the end of ART and the lottery value. In this embodiment, the ART return types are "end" (finished without returning to ART), "immediate return" (return to the ART state in the next game after the end of ART), and "return to navigation" (after the end of ART). , When the navigation is executed, it returns to the ART state) and "return to the precursory game" (returns to the precursory game in the ART state).

In the loop lottery process at the end of ART using the loop lottery table at the end of ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used for ART. In the loop lottery table at the end, the lottery value for each ART return type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the ART return type at that time has been won.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the ART return type "end" is won with a probability of 27748/32768, and the ART return type "immediate return" is won with a probability of 3280/32768, and the probability of 164/32768. In, the ART return type "navigation return" is won, and the ART return type "precursor return" is won with a probability of 1476/32768.

[BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table]
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table is a BGZ mode winning combination based on the presence or absence of an internal winning combination and a lock game in the BGZ stock lottery processing (normal time) during the normal intermediate processing (see FIG. 265 described later) described later. It is used when determining the type (including non-winning).

The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table has BGZ mode winning types (non-winning, BGZ mode 1 winning and BGZ mode 2 winning) set for each type of combination of presence / absence of lock game and internal winning combination. The correspondence with the lottery value is specified.

BGZ stock lottery (normal time) The combination type "S None Other" of the presence or absence of a lock game specified in the table and the internal winning combination is a game lock called "short lock" (corresponding to lock numbers 1 and 2). Is not performed, and the internal winning combination is other than the "chance eye" (internal winning combination corresponding to the data pointer 49). The combination type "S chance eye" of the presence or absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination corresponds to the case where the short lock is performed and the internal winning combination is the "chance eye". Further, the combination type "S-less R2 ice" of the presence / absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination relates to the "ice" of the data pointer 43 or 44 in the state where the short lock is not performed and the lock number 2 is won. Corresponds to the case where a small role wins internally.

Further, the "BGZ mode 1" specified in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table corresponds to the BGZ without navigation, and the "BGZ mode 2" corresponds to the BGZ with navigation.

In the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) using the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) in the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type of the BGZ mode at that time is winning.

For example, when the combination type of the presence / absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is "S-less chance", the BGZ mode is not won with a probability of 24576/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is set with a probability of 7864/32768. Winning, BGZ mode 2 wins with a probability of 328/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the normal state, when the BGZ mode is won, the BGZ with navigation may be won.

[BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table. The BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table is used for the ART preparation process described later (see FIG. 268 described later), the ART process described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later), and the XR process described later (see FIG. 276 described later). In the BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) during each process of (see FIG. 278) and the XRC process described later (see FIG. 280 described later), the winning type of the BGZ mode is based on the presence or absence of the internal winning combination and the lock game. Used in determining (including non-winning).

The configuration of the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (combination type of presence / absence of lock game and internal winning combination, and winning type of BGZ mode) is the above-mentioned BGZ stock lottery except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is the same as that of the table (normal time), the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

In the BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) using the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) in the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type of the BGZ mode at that time is winning.

For example, when the combination type of the presence / absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is "S-less chance", the BGZ mode has a probability of 19456/32768 and the BGZ mode 1 has a probability of 1024/32768. Winning, BGZ mode 2 wins with a probability of 12288/32768.

[BGZ lottery game number table lottery table]
Next, various BGZ lottery game number tables and lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 165. BGZ lottery game number table The lottery table determines the BGZ lottery table number in the BGZ lottery game table lottery process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) during the pseudo-bonus end (winning) process described later (see FIG. 292 below). Used when.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 1. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 2) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 2. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 3) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 3. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 4) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 4. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 5. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 6) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 6. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 7) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 7. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 8) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 8.

Further, FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 9) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 9. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 10) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 10. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 11) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 11. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 12) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 12. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 13) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 13. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 14) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 14. Then, FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (No. 15) referred to when the previous BGZ lottery table number is 15.

BGZ lottery game number table The lottery table defines the correspondence between the types of BGZ lottery table numbers (1 to 15) set for each pseudo-bonus end type (RB end or BB end) and the lottery value.

BGZ lottery game number table In the BGZ lottery game table lottery process using the lottery table (at the end of the pseudo bonus), first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The randomized value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each BGZ lottery table number in the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the BGZ lottery table number at that time is won.

For example, if the previous BGZ lottery table number is 1 and the pseudo bonus end type is RB end, the BGZ lottery table number 4 wins with a probability of 8754/32768 and the BGZ lottery table has a probability of 5250/32768. Number 5 wins, BGZ lottery table number 6 wins with a probability of 700/32768, BGZ lottery table number 7 wins with a probability of 8754/32768, and BGZ lottery table number 8 wins with a probability of 5250/32768. , BGZ lottery table number 9 wins with a probability of 700/32768.

Further, in this case, the BGZ lottery table number 10 wins with a probability of 1500/32768, the BGZ lottery table number 11 wins with a probability of 900/32768, and the BGZ lottery table number 12 wins with a probability of 120/32768. The BGZ lottery table number 13 wins with a probability of 500/32768, the BGZ lottery table number 14 wins with a probability of 300/32768, and the BGZ lottery table number 15 wins with a probability of 40/32768.

[BG challenge content lottery table]
Next, various BG challenge content lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. The BG challenge content lottery table is used to determine the correct / incorrect answer of the BG challenge (alternative production) in the BG challenge content lottery process in the BGZ intermediate process (see FIG. 283 described later) described later. Be done. In this embodiment, a plurality of BG challenge modes (modes 0 to 3) are provided.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge content lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 0 or 1. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge content lottery table (No. 2) referred to when the current BG challenge mode is 2.

The BG challenge content lottery table defines the correspondence between the correct / incorrect content types of the BG challenge (choice of choice) set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The types of internal winning combinations specified in the BG challenge content lottery table are the same as those of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables described above. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the BG challenge content lottery table is omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the content types of the correct and incorrect answers of the BG challenge (choice of choice) are "all incorrect answers", "left correct answer 1: correct answer 1 when not selected", and "left correct answer 1: non". "Incorrect answer when selected", "Right correct answer 1: Correct answer when not selected 1", "Right correct answer 1: Incorrect answer when not selected", "Both correct answers 1: Correct answer when not selected 1", "Left correct answer 2: When not selected" Correct answer 2 ”,“ Left correct answer 2: Incorrect answer when not selected ”,“ Right correct answer 2: Correct answer when not selected 2 ”,“ Right correct answer 2: Incorrect answer when not selected ”and“ Both correct answer 2: Correct answer when not selected 2 11 types are provided.

In the BG challenge content lottery process using the BG challenge content lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the BG challenge content. In the lottery table, the lottery value for each type of correct / incorrect answer of BG challenge is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the content type of the correct answer / incorrect answer of the BG challenge at that time is won.

For example, when the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is "strong ice", as shown in FIG. 166, "left correct answer 1: correct answer 1 when not selected" and "left correct answer 1:" Either "Incorrect answer when not selected", "Right correct answer 1: Correct answer when not selected 1" or "Right correct answer 1: Incorrect answer when not selected" is always won. Further, for example, when the current BG challenge mode is 1 and the internal winning combination is "R2 ice", "both correct answers 1: correct answer 1 when not selected" is always won.

[BG challenge mode transition table]
Next, various BG challenge mode transition tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 175. The BG challenge mode transition table is used when determining the BG challenge mode of the transition destination in the BG challenge mode transition lottery process in the BGZ intermediate process (see FIG. 283 described later) described later.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 1) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 2) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no winning of a pseudo bonus other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 3) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is a pseudo-bonus winning other than the final game of BGZ. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 4) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is a pseudo-bonus winning other than the final game of BGZ.

Further, FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a configuration of a BG challenge mode transition table (No. 5) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is no pseudo-bonus winning in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 6) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is no pseudo-bonus winning in the final game of BGZ. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 7) referred to when the BGZ mode is 1 and there is a pseudo-bonus winning in the final game of BGZ. Then, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BG challenge mode transition table (No. 8) referred to when the BGZ mode is 2 and there is a winning of the pseudo bonus in the final game of BGZ.

The BG challenge mode transition table defines the correspondence between the type (0 to 3) of the migration destination BG challenge mode set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. Of the various internal winning combinations specified in the BG challenge mode transition table, except for "bell winning (normal)" and "bell winning (ART)", the pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table shown in FIG. 55 and the like is used. Same as described. The "bell prize (normal)" corresponds to the case where the small winning combination related to the "push order bell" of the data pointers "39" to "41" wins internally in the normal state, and the "bell prize (ART)" is , Corresponds to the case where the small winning combination related to the "pushing order bell" of the data pointers "39" to "41" is internally won in the ART state.

In the BG challenge mode transition lottery process using the BG challenge mode transition table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a BG challenge. In the mode transition table, the lottery value for each type of BG challenge mode is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the BG challenge mode at that time is won.

For example, if the BGZ mode is 1, there is no pseudo-bonus winning other than the final game of BGZ, and the internal winning combination is "strong ice", the probability of 16384/32768 is as shown in FIG. 168. Wins BG Challenge Mode 1 (no transition) and wins BG Challenge Mode 2 with a probability of 16384/32768.

In this embodiment, the columns related to the "pushing order bell" ("pushing order bell", "bell winning (normal)" and "bell winning (ART)") in the BG challenge mode transition table shall not be referred to. do. That is, when the small winning combination related to the "pushing order bell" is internally won, the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to.

[Push order navigation lottery table]
Next, various push order navigation lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 223. The push order navigation lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type of the push order navigation set for each type of the internal winning combination and the lottery value in the predetermined RT game state.

In the push order navigation generation lottery process using the push order navigation lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected in the push order. The lottery value of the winning type of the push order navigation specified in the navigation lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type of the push order navigation at that time is winning.

(1) Push Order Navigation Lottery (Normal) Table With reference to FIGS. 176 to 179, various push order navigation lottery (normal) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (normal) table is used for the push order navigation generation lottery process during each process of the normal intermediate process (see FIG. 265 described later) and the pseudo bonus end waiting process (see FIG. 291 described later). Used.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (normal) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

In the push order navigation lottery (normal) table, the winning types of push order navigation are "left 1st navigation" (notifying that the left reel 3L is stopped first) and "middle 1st navigation" (middle reel 3C is the first). Notify that it will stop), "Right 1st Navi" (notify that the right reel 3R will be stopped first), "Left-Middle-Right Navi" (Notify the stop order of "Left Middle Right"), "Left- Right-middle navigation "(notify the stop order of" left and right middle ")," middle-left-right navigation "(notify the stop order of" middle left and right ")," middle-right-left navigation "(" middle right left " Stop order of "Non-occurrence" is stipulated.

In addition, the contents of various internal winning combinations specified in the push order navigation lottery (normal) table are as follows. The "middle correct answer bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "38". The "right-left-middle correct answer bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "39". The "right-middle-left correct answer bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "40". The "irregular correct answer bell" is a small role related to the "bell" that is internally won by the data pointer "41".

"MB role (14 in the middle left and right) (15 remaining)" is a data pointer "in the situation where the remaining number of medals to be paid out until the end of the MB is 15 (the first game of the MB game)". Corresponds to the case where a small winning combination (code name "BM01") related to "Bell" with 14 payouts specified in "51" or "52" is internally won. "MB role (14 in the middle left and right) (14 or less remaining)" is data in the situation where the number of medals to be paid out until the end of MB is 14 or less (after the second game of MB game). Corresponds to the case where a small winning combination (code name "BM01") related to a "bell" whose payout number is 14 specified in the pointer "51" or "52" is internally won. "MB role (both 14 cards) (remaining 15 cards)" is a data pointer "53" in the situation where the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the end of MB is 15 (first game of MB game). It corresponds to the case where the small winning combination related to the "bell" specified in "57" is internally won.

"RT2 transition-middle-left-right rip" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "3". "RT2 transition-middle-right-left rip" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "4". "RT2 transition-right-left-middle lip" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "5". "RT2 transition-right-middle-left rip" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "6" or "7".

"RT2 transition-middle-left-right (for RT4)" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "32". "RT2 transition-middle-right-left (for RT4)" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "33". "RT2 transition-right-left-middle (for RT4)" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "34". "RT2 transition-right-middle-left (for RT4)" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "35".

"Left middle stage don lip-1st RT0" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "10". "Left middle stage don lip-right 1st RT0" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "11". "Left Don Lip-1st RT4" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "12". "Left Don Lip-1st RT4" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "13".

"Left RB rip-1st RT0" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "14". "Left RB rip-right 1st RT0" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "15". "During RT3, during transition to RT4, 1st" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "30". "RT3 middle RT4 transition right 1st" is an internal winning replay role in the data pointer "31".

"1st during transition to direct cannibal" corresponds to the case where the data pointer "1" is internally won in the RT4 game state and the lock number 4 is won in the game lock lottery. "Direct cannibal transition right 1st" corresponds to the case where the data pointer "1" is internally won in the RT4 game state and the lock number 5 is won in the game lock lottery.

The "triple aiming donlip" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "8". In addition, the "triple aiming medium donlip" is a replay role that is internally won by the data pointer "9".

(2) Push Order Navigation Lottery (ART) Table With reference to FIGS. 180 to 183, various push order navigation lottery (ART) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (ART) table is used for the ART processing described later (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later), the rocket processing described later (see FIGS. 281 and 282 described later), and the pseudo bonus end standby described later. It is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during each process of the intermediate process (see FIG. 291 described later).

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) has the same configuration as the above-mentioned push order navigation lottery (normal) table except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(3) Push Order Navigation Lottery (XR Carnival Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 184 to 187, various push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table is used for the push order navigation during each of the XR processing (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later) and the XRC processing (see FIG. 280 described later) described later. It is used in the generation lottery process (XR carnival transition).

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(4) Push Order Navigation Lottery (RB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 188 to 191, various push order navigation lottery (RB transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the process in the confirmation screen described later (see FIG. 285 described later).

FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(5) Push Order Navigation Lottery (Red 7 / Don BB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, various push order navigation lottery (Red 7 / Don BB transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the process in the confirmation screen (see FIG. 285 described later) described later.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

In addition, the configuration of the push order navigation lottery (red 7 / don BB transition) table (internal winning combination type and pushing order navigation winning type) is the above-mentioned push order navigation lottery (normal) except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since the configuration is similar to that of a table, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(6) Push Order Navigation Lottery (XBB Transition) Table With reference to FIGS. 196 to 199, various push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the process in the confirmation screen described later (see FIG. 285 described later).

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(7) Push Order Navigation Lottery (During Pseudo Bonus) Table With reference to FIGS. 200 to 203, various push order navigation lottery (during pseudo bonus) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table includes BB processing (see FIG. 287 described later), NRB processing (see FIG. 288) described later, and SRB processing (see FIG. 289 described later) described later. (Refer to) Used in the lottery process (during pseudo-bonus) in which push order navigation occurs.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(8) Push-order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table With reference to FIGS. 204 to 207, various push-order navigation lottery (effect state 0) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the XR process described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later).

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(9) Push-order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table With reference to FIGS. 208 to 211, various push-order navigation lottery (effect state 1) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the XR process described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later).

FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT game state is the RT1 game state. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT game state is the RT2 game state. Further, FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(10) Push-order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table With reference to FIGS. 212 to 215, various push-order navigation lottery (effect state 2) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process during the XR process described later (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later).

FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT game state is the RT1 game state. FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT game state is the RT2 game state. Further, FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(11) Push Order Navigation Lottery (BGZ Mode 2) Table With reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, various push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process (BGZ mode 2) during the BGZ middle process (see FIG. 283 described later) described later.

FIG. 216 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 217 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

(12) Push Order Navigation Lottery (ART Preparing) Table With reference to FIGS. 220 to 223, various push order navigation lottery (ART preparation) tables will be described. The push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table is used in the push order navigation generation lottery process (ART preparing) in the ART preparing process described later (see FIG. 268 described later).

FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (No. 1) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (No. 2) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. FIG. 222 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (No. 3) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state. Further, FIG. 223 is a diagram showing a configuration of a push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (No. 4) referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

The configuration of the push order navigation lottery (in preparation for ART) table (internal winning combination type and push order navigation winning type) is the same as the push order navigation lottery (normal) table described above, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is the configuration of, the description of these table configurations will be omitted.

[Omen game number lottery table]
Next, various precursor game number lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 238. The omen game number lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of omen games to be won and the lottery value set for each stock to be executed next (stock subject to the omen game). In this embodiment, the number of winning games is any of 0 to 64 games.

In the precursor game number lottery process using the precursor game number lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the precursor game number. The lottery value of the number of precursor games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of precursor games at that time has been won.

(1) Precursor game number lottery (normal) table FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the configuration of a precursor game number lottery (normal) table. The precursor game number lottery (normal) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (normal) during the normal process described later (see FIG. 265 described later).

(2) Precursor Game Number Lottery (ART Transition) Table Next, various precursor game number lottery (ART transition) tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. The precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) during the ART preparation process (winning) described later (see FIG. 269 described later).

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 1). The precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 games or more.
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 2). The precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 3). The precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 games or less.

(3) Precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table With reference to FIGS. 228 to 231, various precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) tables will be described. The precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process during the pseudo-bonus end (winning) process (see FIG. 292 described later) described later.

FIG. 228 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 1). The omen game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 1) is usually used at the time of transition. FIG. 229 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 2). The precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 games or more. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 3). The precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 4). The precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (No. 4) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 games or less.

(4) Precursor Game Number Lottery (During ART) Table With reference to FIGS. 232 to 234, various precursor game number lottery (during ART) tables will be described. The precursor game number lottery (during ART) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (during ART, end of XR) in the later-described XR release time process (see FIG. 273 described later).

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 1). The precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 games or more. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 2). The precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 3). The precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 games or less.

(5) Precursor game number lottery (XR end) table With reference to FIGS. 235 to 237, various precursor game number lottery (XR end) tables will be described. The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (during ART, end of XR) in the later-described XR release time process (see FIG. 273 described later).

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 1). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 1) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 20 games or more. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 2). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 10 to 19 games. Further, FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 3). The precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (No. 3) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition is 9 games or less.

(6) Precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the configuration of the precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table. The precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table is used in the precursor game number lottery process (at the end of ART) during the ART in-process (see FIGS. 270 to 272 described later) described later.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 239 to 262, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 239.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 240 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a random number acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main CPU 51 extracts an effect random value (0 to 65535) used in the game lock lottery, and stores the extracted random value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. In this embodiment, it is possible to extract a plurality of types of random values for staging.

Then, when the extracted various random numbers are stored in the random number storage area, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). In this process, the type of "game lock" is determined by lottery based on the effect random value extracted in S5. The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 244 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the lock (reel effect) and the lock timer corresponding to the type (lock number, continuous lock number) of the "game lock" determined in the process of S7 are mainly set. Then, the main CPU 51 waits until the lock timer becomes 0.

In the process of S10, when the lock number is 1 or more, the lock (reel effect) and the lock timer corresponding to the lock number are set. Further, for example, when a continuous lock number (including 0) is acquired, a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the continuous lock number are set.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven by the interrupt processing (see FIG. 262 described later), which is executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is controlled to be maintained.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 246 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 48) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 44). Further, in this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 15). To match. Then, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 15), the number of medals to be inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is 15.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT gaming state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a payout end command to the sub-control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect control process at the end of the game (S20). In this process, the control process of the effect state is mainly performed. The details of the effect control process at the end of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 260 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S21). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 261 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2 and repeats the process after S2.

As described above, the start command transmission process (S9) of the main flow of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the start command, predetermined commands (for example, a reel stop command, a display command, a payout end command, a bonus start command, a bonus end command, etc., which will be described later) are subordinate to various triggers of the game operation. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42, and the transmission process of these command data is also executed by the main control circuit 41.

Further, as described above, in the processing of the main flow of the present embodiment, the game lock control processing is performed (S10), and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (lock control means) for controlling the lock function.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

When the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is an automatic input request (YES determination in S31), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic input process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic charging counter is copied to the charging number counter, and then the value of the automatic charging counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (NO determination in S31), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is driven, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 14 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 51 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 51 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and if a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the insertion number counter.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion command transmission process (S37). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of inserted sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of inserted sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later. In this embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is "3" regardless of the game state (see FIG. 18).

After the processing of S32, if S35 is a NO determination or S38 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is ON (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24. When this process is completed, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described with reference to FIG. 241.

First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S51). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery value change process (S52). In this process, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 are changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S53). Then, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for the internal lottery (S54).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than "0" (negative value) (S55). In S55, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than "0" (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S59 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the calculation result is not less than "0" (NO determination in S55), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes after S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the winning numbers (S58).

After the processing of S58, or when the determination of YES in S55, the main CPU 51 performs the winning number correction processing (S59). In this process, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer when the gaming state is the non-MB (non-CB) gaming state, and when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer. , The value obtained by adding "51" to the value of the winning number is set as a data pointer. The details of the winning number correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 243 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 and 26) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the data pointer (S60).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S61). Next, the main CPU 51 updates the carry-over combination storage area based on the data of bits 4 to 7 (“C_MB1” to “C_MB4”) of the internal winning combination storage area 2 (S62).

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S63). Then, after the processing of S63, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (internal winning combination determining means) for executing the internal winning combination determining process.

[Lottery price change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the lottery value changing process performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 241) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT0 game state flag is on with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45) (S71). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 0 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 45). Then, when the main CPU 51 determines in S71 that the RT0 game state flag is ON (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (FIG. 241). See), move to S53.

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT0 game state flag is not on (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 is an internal lottery table for RT corresponding to the RT game state in the ON state. (S72), the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) are changed with reference to. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value change process, and shifts the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 241).

[Winning number correction process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the winning number correction processing performed in S59 in the flowchart of the internal lottery processing (see FIG. 241) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer (S81). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the CB (MB) is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45) (S82).

In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CB (MB) is not operating (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S84 described later. On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the CB (MB) is operating (when the determination in S82 is YES), the main CPU 51 adds "51" to the value of the data pointer, and the added value thereof. Is set as a data pointer (S83).

After the processing of S83, or when the determination in S82 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is carrying over the MB and the winning number is 50 (S84). When the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the determination condition of S84 is not satisfied (NO determination in S84), the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction process and performs the process in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 241). Move to S60.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S84 that the determination condition of S84 is satisfied (YES determination in S84), the main CPU 51 sets 0 in the data pointer (S85). Then, after the processing of S85, the main CPU 51 ends the winning number correction processing, and shifts the processing to S60 of the internal lottery processing (see FIG. 241).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is less than "2" (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is less than "2" (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIGS. 38 to 42). , The game lock lottery is performed based on the random value for production (S92). When the game lock is won by this process, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding game lock flag and lock timer. If the game lock with lock number 4 or 5 is won, the game is not locked in the winning unit game (current unit game), and the stop button is pressed in the predetermined order (correct answer). At the time), the game is locked in the next unit game. Then, after the processing of S92, the main CPU 51 performs the processing of S95 described later.

On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not less than "2" (when the determination of S91 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the value of the effect state is "3" or more. (S93). In S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not "3" or more (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S95 described later.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value in the effect state is "3" or more (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 51 uses the lottery table in the continuous game lock state (see FIG. 43). With reference to this, the continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the random value for production (S94).

In the process of S94, when the value of the effect state is less than "5", that is, when the current unit game is the unit game of the first game or the second game of the XRC mode, the main CPU 51 is the effect lottery value. The value obtained by doubling is used as the lottery value for production. By this process, in the first game or the second game of the XRC mode, the continuous game lock lottery is always won, and the continuation of the XRC mode is guaranteed.

Then, in the process of S94, when the continuous game lock lottery is won, the main CPU 51 sets the remaining number of winning lottery as the continuous lock number. On the other hand, if the continuous game lock lottery is not won, the main CPU 51 sets the continuous lock number to "0" and sets the value in the effect state to "6". In this process, even when the internal winning combination is a rare combination (including the data pointer 58), the lottery value for directing is doubled to ensure that the continuous game lock lottery is won (continuously confirmed). good.

After the processing of S94 or when the determination of S93 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect game counter (S95). The staging game counter is a counter that manages the number of precursor games in the XRC mode.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect game counter is "0" (S96). In S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S96 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S8.

On the other hand, in S96, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect game counter is "0" (when the determination in S96 is YES), the main CPU 51 uses the lottery table (see FIG. 43) in the continuous game lock state. With reference to this, the continuous game lock lottery process is performed based on the random value for production (S97). Then, after the processing of S97, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery processing and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 refers to the rotation stop number selection table (see FIG. 27), and based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 239, the rotation stop stop. Obtain the number (S101).

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 28), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 51 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The time table change initial data and the irregular press time table selection data are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 48) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 239). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Retract priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S111). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S112). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the spinning reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the process of S112, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S121, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S112 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S121, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S112 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S113). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the symbol check count (S114). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storage process (S115). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 248 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 44) based on the symbol code acquired in S115 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 48) (S116). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that may be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In this embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the symbol of the stopped reel and the corresponding displayable combination prepared in advance, or the symbol of the stopped reel may be acquired. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 51 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 44) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The pull-in priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 34).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 49) (S118). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 51 adds "1" to the symbol position data and subtracts "1" from the symbol check count (S119).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S120). In S120, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S120 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S115 and repeats the processing after S115.

On the other hand, in S120, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S120 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S112 and repeats the processes after S112. On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S113 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 246) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S131). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process is transferred to S114 (see FIG. 246).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S131 that the pull-in priority table number is not set (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 47) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 46) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S132). Then, after the processing of S132, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S114 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 246).

In S132, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the symbol code storage process performed in S115 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 246) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S141). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S142). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S143). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S116 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 246).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described with reference to FIG. 249.

First, the main CPU 51 performs a stop button detection process (S151). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed, and also determines whether or not the left stop button has been pressed in the first stop operation. The details of the stop button detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 250 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 47) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 46) based on the detection result of the stop button detection process of S151 (determination result of the effectively pressed stop button). Is updated (S152). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the stop button non-operation counter (S153).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S154). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S155).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S156). The details of the slip piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 251 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42 (S157). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S156, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 53 (S158). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S158 as the search symbol position (S159). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 248 (S160). After that, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 48) using the symbol code acquired in S160 (S161).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S162). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S163 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S163 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. do.

On the other hand, in S163, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S163), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S164). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S157. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S164 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S157.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S165). In S165, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inactive counter is not "0" (NO determination in S165), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 246 (S166). .. After that, the main CPU 51 returns the processing to S151 and repeats the processing after S151.

On the other hand, in S165, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S165 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 239). See), move to S15.

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuation of the symbol).

[Stop button detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the stop button detection process performed in S151 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is a pressed stop button (S171). In S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no pressed stop button (when the determination in S171 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and performs the process as a reel stop control process (see FIG. 249). Move to S152.

On the other hand, in S171, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is a pressed stop button (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation. (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is not the first stop operation (when the determination in S172 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later.

On the other hand, in S172, when the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation (when the determination in S172 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L has been pressed. (S173). In this process, when there is only one stop button pressed in the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is the left stop button 17L. Further, in this process, when there are a plurality of stop buttons pressed in the first stop operation, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is included in the plurality of pressed stop buttons. Determine.

When the main CPU 51 determines in S173 that the left stop button 17L is not pressed (NO determination in S173), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S175 described later. On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button 17L has been pressed (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the left stop button 17L as a effectively pressed stop button (S174). .. Then, after the processing of S174, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing and shifts the processing to S152 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 249).

When the determination in S172 or S173 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 51 determines that a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (YES in S175), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and performs the process as a reel stop control process (see FIG. 249). Move to S152. That is, when a plurality of stop buttons are pressed in a stop operation other than the first stop operation, or when the stop button pressed in the first stop operation does not include the left stop button, this stop button is used. The pressing operation is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 51 determines that a plurality of stop buttons are not pressed (NO determination in S175), the main CPU 51 is a stop button of the reel in which the pressed stop button is rotating. Whether or not it is determined (S176). In S176, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is not the stop button of the rotating reel (when the determination in S176 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection process and stops the process on the reel. The control process (see FIG. 249) is transferred to S152. That is, when the pressed stop button is the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel, the pressing operation of the stop button is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, in S176, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is the stop button of the rotating reel (when the determination in S176 is YES), the main CPU 51 effectively presses the pressed stop button. Set as a stop button (S177). Then, after the processing of S177, the main CPU 51 ends the stop button detection processing and shifts the processing to S152 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 249).

As described above, in S171 to S174 of the stop button detection process of the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first stop operation of the reel, the left stop button 17L is pressed. Is enabled, and pressing other stop buttons is disabled. Then, this process is executed by the main CPU 51. That is, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first stop operation of the reel, the main CPU 51 determines that the pressing operation of the left stop button 17L is an effective pressing operation. Also serves as a means to do.

[Processing to determine the number of slip pieces]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the slip piece number determination process performed in S156 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “1000000” in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as the line mask data. do.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S182). When the main CPU 51 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 252 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S182 that it is the first stop (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 28). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the first stop table for forward push corresponding to the forward push table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 51 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressed table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the slip piece number determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

After the processing of S183, S186 or S190, the main CPU 51 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" or "1" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the slip piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S157 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 251) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). When the main CPU 51 determines in S201 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 51 presses the stop buttons in order (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253 described later.

After the processing of S203, or when the determination of S201 or S202 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs the line mask data change processing (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 29, 31 and 32).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 51 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 251) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 252). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). In S211 when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 252). ) Move to the processing of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 31 and 32), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, in S213, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit is not on. The check process is completed, and the process is transferred to the process of S189 in the slide piece number determination process (see FIG. 251) or the process of S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 252).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 51 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 252). ) Move to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 251) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 252). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). It should be noted that the C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the control change process after the second stop (see FIG. 257), which will be described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" in the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 31) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 252). ) Move to the processing of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice (when the determination is NO). S224). If it is a forward push and the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the process of S224 changes the line mask data from "00010000" to "01000000". As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 252). ) Move to the processing of S205.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S221 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S221 that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the B line status is set in the main CPU 51. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S225). When the main CPU 51 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. Move to the process of S190 in (see 251) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 252).

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 31 and 32) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 252). ) Move to the processing of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 251) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the search order counter to "1" as an initial value. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the number of checks to the data length of the search order table as an initial value. Specifically, when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state and the search target reel is a reel whose maximum number of sliding pieces is stopped and controlled at one frame, the initial value of the number of checks is ". 2 ”is set, and in other cases,“ 5 ”is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the number of slip pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected stop start address, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the previously acquired attraction priority data (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the previously acquired attraction priority data (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S238 described later. conduct.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the previously acquired attraction priority data (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 51 slips acquired in S234. Evacuate the number of pieces (S237).

After the processing of S237 or when the determination in S236 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the number of checks and adds "1" to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). Then, after the processing of S240, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control processing and also ends the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 251).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the control change process performed in S162 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and performs the process in S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 257 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 249).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 51 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S163 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 249).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 51 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 30). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the changed target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259).

In S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257. On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the second step when the value of the table change initial data at the time of forward pressing is pressed forward. It is acquired as a third stop table number and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 249).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 51 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S163 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 249).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 256) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 51 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 256). ..

On the other hand, in S271, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 is pushed forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 in the control change process (see FIG. 256). Then, when the main CPU 51 determines in S272 that the C line check data is not on (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. 256) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 256) is also terminated.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 51 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing after the second stop, and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 256).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described with reference to FIG. 258.

First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (NO determination in S282), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and shifts. Based on the condition, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

After the processing of S283, or when the determination of S282 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs the display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

As described above, the RT control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for controlling the transition of the RT gaming state.

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the "MB" is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45) (S291). In S291, when the main CPU 51 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process and is in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S20.

On the other hand, in S291, when the main CPU 51 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S292).

In S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the bonus end processing (S293). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "MB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 14 during the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S294). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S295). Then, after the processing of S295, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

On the other hand, in S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S296). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the playable count counter is "1" for one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning count counter or the playable count counter is “0” (S297). In S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S297 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

On the other hand, in S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S297 is YES), the main CPU 51 processes at the end of CB. (S298). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the winning count counter and the game play counter is performed. Then, after the processing of S298, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

[Production control process at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the game end-time effect control process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is "6" (S301).

In S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is "6" (when the determination in S301 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later. On the other hand, in S301, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not "6" (when the determination of S301 is NO), the main CPU 51 has the value of the effect state less than "3" and RT. It is determined whether or not there is a transition of the gaming state (S302).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S302 that the determination condition of S302 is satisfied (when the determination in S302 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S302 that the determination condition of S302 is not satisfied (NO determination in S302), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the lock number is "4" or "5". (S303).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S303 that the lock number is "4" or "5" (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S311 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S303 that the lock number is not "4" or "5" (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a push order check process (S304). In this process, the main CPU 51 combines the internal winning combination and the stopping order in the current unit game according to the correspondence table between the winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition (only in the columns of the data pointers 32 to 35) shown in FIG. Check the transition contents of the RT game state and the transition contents of the locked state corresponding to.

After the processing of S304, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the lock state is "reset" based on the result of the push order check processing of S304 (S305). In S305, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition of the locked state is "reset" (when the determination in S305 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S306 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S305 that the transition of the locked state is not "reset" (when the determination in S305 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S307 described later.

When the determination in S301, S302 or S305 is YES, the main CPU 51 performs the effect state reset process (S306). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the effect game counter and sets the value of the effect state to "0". Then, after the processing of S306, the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and shifts the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

Further, when the determination in S305 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition of the locked state is “1 step UP” and the value of the effect state is less than “2” (S307). When the main CPU 51 determines in S307 that the determination condition of S307 is not satisfied (NO determination in S307), the main CPU 51 ends the game end-time effect control process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S21.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S307 that the determination condition of S307 is satisfied (YES in S307), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the value in the effect state (S308). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the effect state is "2" (S309).

In S309, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is not "2" (when the determination in S309 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 239). See), move to S21. On the other hand, in S309, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the effect state is "2" (when the determination in S309 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "2" in the effect state counter (S310). Then, after the processing of S310, the main CPU 51 ends the effect control processing at the end of the game, and shifts the processing to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

Here, returning to S303 again and determining YES in S303, the main CPU 51 is on the condition that the lock number is "4" and the first stop is the middle reel 3C, or the lock number is "5". It is determined whether or not there is a condition that the first stop is the right reel 3R (S311).

When the main CPU 51 determines in S311 that the determination condition of S311 is not satisfied (NO determination in S311), the main CPU 51 ends the game end-time effect control process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S21. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S311 that the determination condition of S311 is satisfied (YES determination in S311), the main CPU 51 sets "2" to the value of the effect state (S312).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the value of the effect state counter to "1" (S313). Then, after the processing of S313, the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and shifts the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the bonus operation check process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the "MB" is in operation (S321). When the main CPU 51 determines in S321 that "MB" is not in operation (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S324 described later.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "CB" is in operation (S322). ). In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that "CB" is in operation (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that "CB" is not operating (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 processes during CB operation based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). (S323). Then, after the processing of S323, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

Further, when the determination in S321 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S324). In S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S324 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S328 described later.

On the other hand, in S324, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is a winning (when the determination in S324 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 16). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S325). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 51 sets "1" in the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 45) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“14”). Further, in this process, the CB operating process described in S323 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S326). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S327). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus start command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after the processing of S327, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

Further, when the determination in S324 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S328). In S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S328 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 239). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S328, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S328 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S329). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S329, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 239).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, for example, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 239) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S331). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S332). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S333). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 51 clears the game lock flag. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a communication data transmission process (S334). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S335). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all the reels is requested, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S335, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp 7-segment drive process (S336). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register reset process (S337). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 263 to 292, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 by using the program will be described. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83 and the like.

[Processing when a start command is received]
The process at the time of receiving the start command will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs an operation-time process of the start lever 16 corresponding to the sub-game state (S341). In this process, various sub-game state processes described later (for example, the normal process in FIG. 265 described later, the ART process in FIGS. 270 to 272 described later, and the like) are performed.

Next, an effect process such as a sub CPU 81 and a predetermined navigation is performed (S342). Then, after the processing of S342, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command.

[Processing when a display command is received]
Next, the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described with reference to FIG. 264.

The sub CPU 81 performs a winning process corresponding to the sub game state (S351). In this process, various sub-game states (winning) processes described later (for example, normal processing (winning) in FIG. 267 described later, ART processing (winning) in FIG. 275 described later, etc.) are performed. Then, after the processing of S351, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command.

[Normal processing]
Next, the normal processing performed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 265.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S361). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games that have been consumed since the end of the pseudo bonus. Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the game number counter.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the expected degree of transition to BGZ in the normal state or the ART state changes according to the number of digested games after the end of the pseudo bonus. The relationship between the number of digested games and the degree of expectation of transition to BGZ is defined by various BGZ lottery tables determined by lottery using the BGZ lottery game number lottery table (see FIGS. 151 to 165). Then, when the BGZ lottery is performed with reference to the BGZ lottery table, the number of games countered by the processing of S361 is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the precursor game number subtraction process (S362). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery process (normal) (S363). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to a pseudo-bonus lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 55 to 60), a pseudo-bonus lottery mode, presence / absence of pseudo-bonus stock (between flags / non-flags), and an internal winning combination. Based on the above, the types of winning / non-winning of the pseudo-bonus and the pseudo-bonus at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S364).

In S364, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (NO determination in S364), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S366 described later. On the other hand, in S364, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has been won (when the determination in S364 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (at the time of winning the pseudo bonus) (S365). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo-bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 85 to 87), and based on the pseudo-bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the pseudo-bonus, the presence / absence of winning in the XR mode and The XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

After the processing of S365, or when the determination of S364 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the ceiling processing (S366). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs a predetermined process at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo-bonus. For example, when the current game is a game with the number of XR ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process or the like performed at the time of winning the XR. Further, for example, when the current game is a game with a pseudo-bonus ceiling game number, the sub CPU 81 performs pseudo-bonus stock processing, XR lottery processing, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (normal time) (S367). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 70), and based on the internal winning combination, determines the presence or absence of winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning. Determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) (S368). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table (see FIG. 149) and is based on the presence or absence of a short lock (game lock of lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , BGZ stock winning / non-winning and BGZ mode type (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus immediate emission flag is in the ON state (S369). The pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is turned on when the type of the pseudo-bonus won in S363 is a pseudo-bonus (Don BB, XBB1 or XBB2) of "immediate release".

In S369, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S369 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "0" in the number of precursor games (counter of precursor games). (S370). Then, after the processing of S370, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S376 described later.

On the other hand, in S369, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the ON state (NO determination in S369), the sub CPU 81 has a precursor game number of "-1" (cleared). ) Or not (S371).

In S371, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not "-1" (when the determination in S371 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S376 described later. On the other hand, in S371, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is "-1" (when the determination in S371 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of normal stocks is "1" or more. (S372).

In S372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not "1" or more (when the determination in S372 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S376 described later. On the other hand, in S372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is "1" or more (when the determination in S372 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (normal) (S373). ). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 224), and based on the stock type to be released (type of stocked game mode), the precursor game number (0). ~ 64 games) will be decided by lottery.

After the processing of S373, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S373 is larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (S374).

In S374, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S373 is larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (when the determination in S374 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub CPU 81 is S376 described later. Is processed. On the other hand, in S374, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games (lottery result) won in S373 is not larger than the current number of precursor games (0 or more) (when the determination in S374 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines. The lottery result is set to the current number of precursor games (S375).

After the processing of S370 or S375, if S371 or S372 is a NO determination, or if S374 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition process (S376). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and based on the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination, the migration destination pseudo-bonus lottery mode The value (0 to 2) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (normal) (S377). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 176 to 179), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation winning / non-winning and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus immediate emission flag is in the ON state (S378).

In S378, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is on (when the determination in S378 is YES), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released, the sub-game state and Set the pseudo bonus type (S379). By this processing, the game of the pseudo-bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding processing during the sub-game state is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "normal" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S380). In this embodiment, the stock of the pseudo-bonus won during the pseudo-bonus ceiling game and the stock of the pseudo-bonus won during the non-pseudo-bonus ceiling game (normal time) are distinguished. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-bonus of immediate release is won except during the pseudo-bonus ceiling game (normal time). Therefore, in the processing of S380, the pseudo-bonus stock of the release target (immediate release) is "normal" (normal). Pseudo-bonus Ceiling information other than during the game (normal time) is set. Then, after the processing of S380, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal processing.

On the other hand, in S378, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate emission flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S378 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the normal middle state transition process (S381). The details of the normal state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 266 described later. Then, after the processing of S381, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal processing.

[Normal state transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the normal middle state transition process performed in S381 in the flowchart of the normal middle process (see FIG. 265) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S391).

In S391, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S391 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S402 described later. On the other hand, in S391, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S391 is YES), does the sub CPU 81 determine whether the type of the normal stock to be released is BGZ? Whether or not it is determined (S392).

In S392, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is BGZ (when the determination in S392 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the BGZ in the sub game state (S393). By this processing, the game of BGZ is started from the next game, and the processing during BGZ shown in FIG. 283, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S393, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 265).

On the other hand, in S392, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is not BGZ (when the determination in S392 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the normal stock to be released is ART. Is determined (S394).

In S394, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is ART (when the determination in S394 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state in the sub game state (S395). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and the ART preparation process shown in FIG. 268, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S395, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 265).

On the other hand, in S394, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is not ART (when the determination in S394 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the type of the normal stock to be released is a pseudo bonus. (S396).

In S396, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is a pseudo bonus (when the determination in S396 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen state in the sub game state (S397). By this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process in the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 285, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released in the pseudo-bonus type (S398). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "normal" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S399). Then, after the processing of S399, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition process and also ends the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

On the other hand, in S396, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is not a pseudo bonus (when the determination in S396 is NO), does the sub CPU 81 determine whether the type of the normal stock to be released is the XR mode? Whether or not it is determined (S400).

In S400, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is not the XR mode (when the determination in S400 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S402 described later.

On the other hand, in S400, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the normal stock to be released is the XR mode (when the determination in S400 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state in the sub game state (S401). ). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and the ART preparation process shown in FIG. 268, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S401, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 265).

When the determination in S391 or S400 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state in the sub game state (S402). By this processing, the game in the normal state is started again from the next game, and the normal middle processing shown in FIG. 265, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S402, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle state transition processing and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 265).

[Normal processing (winning)]
Next, the normal intermediate processing (winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 267.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S411).

In S411, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO determination in S411), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal intermediate processing (winning). On the other hand, in S411, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S411 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state. (S412).

In S412, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is not the ART preparation state (NO determination in S412), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal intermediate processing (winning). On the other hand, in S412, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is the ART ready state (when the determination in S412 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S413). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART direct migration flag to "1" (S414). The ART direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sub-game state directly shifts from the normal state to the ART state, and when the sub-game state shifts directly from the normal state to the ART state, the ART direct shift flag is used. "1" is set in the migration flag. Then, after the processing of S414, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal middle processing (winning).

[Processing during ART preparation]
Next, the ART preparation process performed in the ART preparation state will be described with reference to FIG. 268.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART flag to "1" (S421). The ART flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the game in the ART state, and when it is confirmed that the game in the ART state is started, "1" is set in the ART flag.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S422). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo-bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), as in the process of S361 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery process (S423). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 61 to 66), the pseudo-bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of the pseudo-bonus stock (between flags / non-flags), and the internal winning. Based on the winning combination, the types of winning / non-winning and pseudo-bonus at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S424).

In S424, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when the determination in S424 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S426 described later. On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has been won (when the determination in S424 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stocks the winning pseudo bonus and performs an XR lottery process (at the time of winning the pseudo bonus). Do (S425). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 85 to 87), and based on the pseudo-bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the pseudo-bonus, the presence / absence of the winning in the XR mode and the winning. The XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time are determined by lottery.

After the processing of S425 or when the determination of S424 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the ceiling processing (S426). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 has the same processing as S366 in the normal processing (see FIG. 265). Performs the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (preparing for ART) (S427). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (ART preparing) table (see FIG. 73), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence or absence of winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning. ) Is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) (S428). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 150) and is based on the presence or absence of a short lock (game lock of lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , The winning / non-winning of the stock of BGZ and the type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition process (S429). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and based on the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination, the migration destination pseudo-bonus lottery mode The value (0 to 2) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (in preparation for ART) (S430). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART preparing) table (see FIGS. 220 to 223), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is in the ON state (S431).

In S431, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is on (when the determination in S431 is YES), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released, the sub-game state and Set the pseudo bonus type (S432). By this processing, the game of the pseudo-bonus to be released from the next game is started, and the corresponding processing during the sub-game state is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "normal" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S433). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S434). The ART return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the ART state after the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode game is completed, and the ART state is set after the pseudo bonus, XR mode or rocket mode game is completed. When returning, "1" is set in the ART return flag. Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing.

On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the ON state (NO determination in S431), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparation state in the sub game state (S435). By this processing, the game in the ART preparation state is started again from the next game, and the ART preparation processing is performed. Then, after the processing of S435, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing.

[Art preparation processing (winning)]
Next, the ART preparation process (winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 269.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S441).

In S441, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO determination in S441), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process (winning). On the other hand, in S441, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S441 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state. (S442).

In S442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is not the ART preparation state (NO determination in S442), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation process (winning). On the other hand, in S442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is the ART ready state (when the determination in S442 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S443). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stocks is “1” or more (S444).

In S444, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is "1" or more (when the determination in S444 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S447 described later. On the other hand, in S444, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is not "1" or more (when the determination in S444 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is "1" or more. Is determined (S445).

In S445, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not "1" or more (NO determination in S445), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing (winning). On the other hand, in S445, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is "1" or more (when the determination in S445 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal stock priority flag to "1" (S446). ). The normal stock priority flag is a flag indicating whether or not the normal stock to be released is released with priority over the XR priority stock, and when the normal stock to be released is released with priority over the XR priority stock, it is normal. "1" is set in the stock priority flag.

After the processing of S446, or when the determination of YES in S444, the sub CPU 81 performs the precursor game number lottery processing (ART shift) (S447). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (ART transition) table (see FIGS. 225 to 227), and based on the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition and the stock type to be released, the precursor game number. (0 to 64 games) is decided by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (ART transition) to the precursor game number (S448). Then, after the processing of S448, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART preparation processing (winning).

[Processing during ART]
Next, the process during ART performed in the ART state will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 to 272.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S451). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo-bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), as in the process of S361 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the precursor game number subtraction process (S452). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter, as in the process of S362 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "immediate return" (S453).

In S453, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "immediate return" (when the determination in S453 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S456 described later.

On the other hand, in S453, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "immediate return" (when the determination in S453 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of ART initial games in the number of ART remaining games (when the determination is YES in S453). S454). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the number of ART initial games (50 games in this embodiment) in the ART remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S455).

After the processing of S455 or when the determination of S453 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "precursor return" (S456).

In S456, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "precursor return" (when the determination in S456 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S458 described later. On the other hand, in S456, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "precursor return" (when the determination in S456 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S457). Then, after the processing of S457 or when the determination in S456 is NO, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the number of ART remaining games (value of the ART remaining game number counter) (S458).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR ceiling mode is "0" (S459).

In S459, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR ceiling mode is not "0" (when the determination in S459 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S461 described later. On the other hand, in S459, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR ceiling mode is "0" (when the determination in S459 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S460). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and determines the migration destination XR ceiling mode by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

After the processing of S460 or when the determination in S459 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR ceiling games is "-1" (ceiling state) (S461). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR ceiling game number counter is "-1".

In S461, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR ceiling games is not "-1" (ceiling state) (when the determination in S461 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of XR ceiling games (value of the XR ceiling game number counter). ) Is subtracted by 1 (S462). Then, after the processing of S462, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S466 described later.

On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR ceiling games is "-1" (ceiling state) (when the determination in S461 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has no stock in the XR mode in the normal stock. In addition, it is determined whether or not the XR priority stock has the stock in the XR mode (S463).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S463 that the determination condition of S463 is not satisfied (NO determination in S463), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S466 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S463 that the determination condition of S463 is satisfied (YES determination in S463), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling game number lottery process 1 (S464). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 1 table (see FIG. 139), and determines the XR ceiling basic game number and the addition value table type by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 (S465). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling game number lottery 2 table (see FIG. 140), and determines the addition value (number of addition games) based on the addition value table type (1 or 2) acquired in S464. Determined by lottery. Then, the added value (number of added games) determined in the XR ceiling game number lottery process 2 is added to the XR basic game number determined in the sub-XR ceiling game number lottery process 1, and the added value (XR ceiling) is added. Set the number of basic games + added value) to the number of XR ceiling games (XR ceiling game number counter).

After the processing of S462 or S465, or when the determination of S463 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery processing (during ART) (S466). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 61 to 66), the pseudo-bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of the pseudo-bonus stock (between flags / non-flags), and the internal winning. Based on the winning combination, the types of winning / non-winning and pseudo-bonus at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S467).

In S467, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when the determination in S467 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S469 described later. On the other hand, in S467, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has been won (when the determination in S467 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stocks the winning pseudo bonus and performs an XR lottery process (at the time of winning the pseudo bonus). Do (S468). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (at the time of pseudo-bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 85 to 87), and based on the pseudo-bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the pseudo-bonus, the presence / absence of winning in the XR mode and The XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

After the processing of S468, or when the determination of S467 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the ceiling processing (S469). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 has the same processing as S366 in the normal processing (see FIG. 265). Performs the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR carnival direct migration lottery process (during ART) (S470). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR Carnival Direct Transition Lottery (ART) table (see FIG. 141) and determines the winning / non-winning of the XR Carnival Direct Transition by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during ART) (S471). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 71 and 72), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence or absence of the winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 1) at the time of winning. 6) is decided by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) (S472). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 150) and is based on the presence or absence of a short lock (game lock of lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , The winning / non-winning of the stock of BGZ and the type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a rocket mode transition lottery process (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 146), and determines the winning / non-winning of the transition to the rocket mode by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus immediate emission flag is in the ON state (S474). The pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is turned on when the type of the pseudo-bonus won in S466 is a pseudo-bonus (Don BB, XBB1 or XBB2) of "immediate release".

In S474, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S474 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "0" in the number of precursor games (counter of precursor games). (S475). Then, after the processing of S475, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S479 described later.

On the other hand, in S474, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S474 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "navigation return". (S476).

In S476, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S476 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S479 described later. On the other hand, in S476, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S476 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the precursor game number (value of the precursor game number counter) "-1. It is determined whether or not it is (cleared) (S477).

In S477, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not "-1" (when the determination in S477 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S479 described later. On the other hand, in S477, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is "-1" (S477 is YES).
(In the case of determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR emission processing (S478). The details of the XR release treatment will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 described later.

After the processing of S475 or S478, if S476 determines YES or S477 determines NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition process (S479). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and based on the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination, the migration destination pseudo-bonus lottery mode The value (0 to 2) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (ART) (S480). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 180 to 183), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation winning / non-winning and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, in the sub CPU 81, the internal winning combination is "pushing order bell" (internal winning combination of data pointers 38 to 40), "RT2 migration lip" (internal winning combination of data pointers 32 to 35), and "MB middle role" (MB middle role). It is determined whether or not it is any of the internal winning combinations of the data pointers 32 to 35 (S481).

In S481, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of "push order bell", "RT2 transition lip", and "MB middle combination" (when S481 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. S485 is processed. On the other hand, in S481, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is any of "push order bell", "RT2 transition lip", and "MB middle combination" (when the determination in S481 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Determines whether or not the ART return type is "navigation return" (S482).

In S482, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S482 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S485 described later. On the other hand, in S482, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S482 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of ART remaining games (value of the ART remaining game counter). Set the ART initial game (S483). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S484).

After the processing of S484, or when S481 or S482 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is "0" (S485). The XR carnival direct transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to directly transition from the ART state to the XRC mode without going through the XR mode, and if it is determined to directly shift from the ART state to the XRC mode, "1" is set in the XR carnival direct transition flag.

In S485, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not "0" (when the determination in S485 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S485, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is "0" (when the determination in S485 is YES), does the sub CPU 81 determine whether the ART return type is "navigation return"? Whether or not it is determined (S486).

In S486, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S486 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S486, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S486 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the number of ART remaining games (value of the ART remaining game counter) ". It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S487).

In S487, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not "0" (when the determination in S487 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S487, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of ART remaining games is "0" (when the determination in S487 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has the number of precursor games (value of the precursor game counter) "-. 1 ”(clear state) or not is determined (S488).

In S488, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is not "-1" (when the determination in S488 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S488, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of precursor games is "-1" (when the determination in S488 is YES), does the sub CPU 81 have a value of the pseudo bonus immediate release flag "0"? Whether or not it is determined (S489).

In S489, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus immediate emission flag is not "0" (when the determination in S489 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S489, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is "0" (when the determination in S489 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a loop lottery process at the end of ART (S490). .. In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the loop lottery table at the end of ART (see FIG. 148), and determines the ART return type (including the end of ART) by lottery.

After the processing of S490, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of the loop lottery processing at the end of ART to the ART return type (S491). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "precursor return" (S492).

In S492, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "precursor return" (when the determination in S492 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S495 described later. On the other hand, in S492, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "precursor return" (when the determination in S492 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART stock at the beginning of the normal stock (S493). ).

After the processing of S493, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery processing (at the end of ART) (S494). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (at the end of ART) table (see FIG. 238), and determines the precursor game number (0 to 64 games) by lottery based on the stock type to be released. ..

After the S494 process, if S485, S487 to S489 or S492 is a NO determination, or if S486 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is "1" (. S495).

In S495, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is not "1" (when the determination in S495 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S502 described later. On the other hand, in S495, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is "1" (when the determination in S495 is YES), does the sub CPU 81 determine whether the ART return type is "navigation return"? Whether or not it is determined (S496).

In S496, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S496 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S499 described later. On the other hand, in S496, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S496 is YES), the sub CPU 81 initially performs ART at the number of remaining ART games (counter for the number of remaining ART games). Set the game (S497). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S498).

After the processing of S498 or when S496 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub game state and the pseudo bonus type corresponding to the contents of the normal stock (S499). By this processing, the game of the corresponding sub-game state is started from the next game, and the processing during the corresponding sub-game state is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S500). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "normal" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S501). Then, after the processing of S501, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART.

Here, returning to S495 again, if S495 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is “0” (S502).

In S502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not "0" (when the determination in S502 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART. On the other hand, in S502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "0" (when the determination in S502 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART state transition process (S503). The details of the ART state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 274 described later. Then, after the processing of S503, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART.

[Treatment at the time of XR release]
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the XR emission processing performed in S478 during the ART processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stocks is "1" or more (S511).

In S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is "1" or more (when the determination in S511 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S514 described later. On the other hand, in S511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is not "1" or more (when the determination in S511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is "1" or more. (S512).

In S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not "1" or more (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR emission processing and performs the processing during ART (FIG. 270). -Refer to FIG. 272), and move to S479. On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is "1" or more (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal stock priority flag to "1" (S513). ).

After the processing of S513, or when the determination of S511 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the precursor game number lottery processing (during ART, end of XR) (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 232 to 234), and based on the number of remaining ART games at the time of ART transition and the stock type to be released, the precursor game number. (0 to 64 games) is decided by lottery.

The XR emission processing shown in FIG. 273 is also performed in the XR processing (see FIGS. 276 to 278 described later) and the XRC processing (see FIG. 280 described later) described later. In this case, , S514, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (XR end) table (see FIGS. 235 to 237) and determines the precursor game number (0 to 64 games) by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of the precursor game number lottery process (during ART, end of XR) is larger than the number of remaining ART games (S515).

In S515, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is not larger than the number of ART remaining games (when the determination in S515 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of precursor games (precursor game counter) (the number of precursor games counter). S516). Then, after the processing of S516, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of XR emission, and shifts the processing to S479 of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

On the other hand, in S515, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is larger than the number of ART remaining games (when the determination in S515 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the number of ART remaining games to the number of precursor games (precursor game counter). Set (S517). Then, after the processing of S517, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of XR emission, and shifts the processing to S479 of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

[ART state transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the state transition process during ART performed in S503 during the process during ART (see FIGS. 270 to 272) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S523 described later. On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of ART remaining games (value of the ART remaining game number counter). Is determined to be "0" (S522).

In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is not "0" (when the determination in S522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART in-state transition process and also performs the ART in-process (FIGS. 270 to 270). (See FIG. 272) also ends. On the other hand, in S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining ART games is "0" (when the determination in S522 is YES), or when the determination in S521 is YES, the sub CPU 81 has the ART return type ". It is determined whether or not it is "navigation return" (S523).

When it is determined in S523 that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S523 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-during state transition process and also performs the ART-during process (see FIGS. 270 to 272). ) Also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S523 that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S523 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the normal stock priority flag is "0" (when it is determined that the ART return type is not "NO"). S524).

In S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the normal stock priority flag is not "0" (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S527 described later. On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the normal stock priority flag is "0" (when the determination in S524 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR priority stock has the stock in the XR mode. (S525).

In S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR priority stock does not have the stock in the XR mode (when the determination in S525 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S527 described later. On the other hand, in S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR priority stock has the stock in the XR mode (when the determination in S525 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub game state (S526). By this processing, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XR shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S526, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

When the determination in S524 or S525 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is BGZ (S527).

In S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is BGZ (when the determination in S527 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the BGZ in the sub game state (S528). By this processing, the game of BGZ is started from the next game, and the processing during BGZ shown in FIG. 283, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S528, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

On the other hand, in S527, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not BGZ (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is in the XR mode (S529).

In S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is in the XR mode (when the determination in S529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub game state (S530). By this processing, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XR shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S530, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not in the XR mode (when the determination in S529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is a pseudo bonus stock (S531). .. In S531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not the stock of the pseudo bonus (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S536 described later.

On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is the stock of the pseudo bonus (when the determination in S531 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen state in the sub game state (S532). By this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process in the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 285, which will be described later, is performed.

After the processing of S532, the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo-bonus type to the value corresponding to the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released (S533). Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S534).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "normal" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S535). Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

Further, when the determination in S531 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal stock is the stock in the rocket mode (S536).

In S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is the rocket mode stock (YES in S536), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode to the sub game state (S537). By this processing, the game of the rocket mode is started from the next game, and the processing in the rocket shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 described later is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S538). Then, after the processing of S538, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

On the other hand, in S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock is not the rocket mode stock (NO determination in S536), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state in the sub game state (S539). By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle process shown in FIG. 265 is performed. Then, after the processing of S539, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART-in-time state transition processing and also ends the ART-in-time processing (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

[Processing during ART (winning)]
Next, the process during ART (winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "navigation return" (S541).

In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "navigation return" (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S544 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S541 that the ART return type is "navigation return" (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT4 gaming state. (S542).

In S542, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not a state other than the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S542 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S544 described later. On the other hand, in S542, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is a state other than the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S542 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "immediate return" in the ART return type (when the RT game state is determined to be YES). S543).

After the processing of S543, or when S541 or S542 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is "1" (S544).

In S544, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not "1" (when the determination in S544 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing (winning). On the other hand, in S544, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "1" (when the determination in S544 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the first stop operation of the stop button by the player. It is determined whether or not the navigation was followed (S545).

In S545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation does not follow the navigation (when the determination in S545 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S553 described later. On the other hand, in S545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation follows the navigation (YES determination in S545), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode in the sub game state (S546). By this processing, the game of the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XRC shown in FIG. 280, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an ART return type (S547).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S547 that there is no ART return type (NO determination in S547), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART in-process (winning). On the other hand, in S547, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an ART return type (when the determination in S547 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return type is "precursor return" (S548). ..

In S548, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is not "precursor return" (when the determination in S548 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S552 described later. On the other hand, in S548, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return type is "precursor return" (when the determination in S548 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is ART stock in the normal stock. (S549).

In S549, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no ART stock in the normal stock (NO determination in S549), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S551 described later. On the other hand, in S549, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal stock has the stock of ART (when the determination in S549 is YES), the sub CPU 81 deletes the stock of ART from the normal stock (S550).

After the processing of S550 or when the determination in S549 is NO, the sub CPU 81 clears (-1) the number of precursor games (value of the precursor game counter) (S551). Next, after the processing of S551 or when S548 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 clears the ART return type (S552). Then, after the processing of S552, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART in-process (winning).

Here, returning to S545 again, when S545 determines NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the ART state transition process described with reference to FIG. 274 (S553). Then, after the processing of S553, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART in-process (winning).

[Processing during XR] Next, the processing during XR performed in the XR mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 278.

First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the number of XR continuous games (S561). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR continuous game number counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S562). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo-bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), as in the process of S361 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during ART) (S563). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 61 to 66), the pseudo-bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of the pseudo-bonus stock (between flags / non-flags), and the internal winning. Based on the winning combination, the types of winning / non-winning and pseudo-bonus at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S564). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 has the same processing as S366 in the normal processing (see FIG. 265). Performs the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR continuous games (value of the XR continuous game number counter) is "1" (S565).

In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuous games is not "1" (when the determination in S565 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S568 described later.

On the other hand, in S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuous games is "1" (when the determination in S565 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR basic G number lottery process (S566). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR basic G number lottery table (see FIGS. 126 and 127), and based on the initial XR basic G number and the internal winning combination, the XR basic game number (5, 10, 20 and). 30) is determined by lottery. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of XR basic games. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" in the combo counter (S567).

Next, after the processing of S567, or when the determination of S565 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR carnival direct transition lottery processing (during XR) (S568). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival direct migration lottery (during XR) table (see FIG. 142) and wins the XR carnival direct migration based on the presence or absence of XR carnival reservation (presence or absence of stock in XRC mode).・ The non-winning is decided by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR continuous games (value of the XR continuous game number counter) is "2" or more (S569).

In S569, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuation games is not "2" or more (when the determination in S569 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR continuation flag to "1" (S578). The XR continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XR mode game is continued, and when the XR mode game is continued, "1" is set in the XR continuation flag. Then, after the processing of S578, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S588 described later.

On the other hand, in S569, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR continuous games is "2" or more (when the determination in S569 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has the value of the XR carnival winning flag "0". Whether or not it is determined (S570). The XR carnival winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XRC mode is won, and if the XRC mode is won, "1" is set in the XR carnival winning flag.

In S570, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is not "0" (when the determination in S570 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S572 described later. On the other hand, in S570, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival winning flag is "0" (when the determination in S570 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR carnival transition lottery process (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival transition lottery (during XR) table (see FIG. 143), and determines the winning / non-winning of the XR carnival transition by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR continuous lottery process (S572). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR continuous lottery table (see FIGS. 130 to 136) and continues the XR mode based on the current XR continuous lottery mode and internal winning combination (rare combination or other). Winning and non-winning are decided by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR continuous lottery has been won (S573).

In S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR continuous lottery has been won (when the determination in S573 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S579 described later. On the other hand, in S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XR continuation lottery has not been won (when the determination in S573 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR discontinuity flag to "1" (S574). The XR discontinuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the XR continuation lottery has been won, and if the XR continuation lottery has not been won, "1" is set in the XR discontinuation flag.

After the processing of S574, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is “1” (S575).

In S575, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "1" (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S579 described later. On the other hand, in S575, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is not "1" (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the value of the XRC carnival winning flag "1". Whether or not it is determined (S576).

In S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC carnival winning flag is "1" (when the determination in S576 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S579 described later. On the other hand, in S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC carnival winning flag is not "1" (when the determination in S576 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR continuation flag to "0" (S577). .. Then, after the processing of S577, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S588 described later.

If S573, S575 or S576 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets the XR continuation flag to "1" (S579). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the combo counter (S580).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (S581).

In S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (NO determination in S581), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S583 described later. On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional game number lottery process at the time of combo (S582). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the combo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 129), and determines the number of additional games (including non-winning) of the number of ART games by lottery based on the number of specific combos. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of games added at the time of combo.

After the processing of S582, or when the determination of S581 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery processing for adding the number of games during XR (S583). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR additional addition table (see FIG. 128), and determines the number of additional games (including non-winning) of ART games by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result to the number of additional games (normal) in the XR.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery for adding the number of games during XR has been won (S584).

In S584, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the additional lottery for adding the number of games during XR (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S588 described later. On the other hand, in S584, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has won the additional lottery for adding the number of games during XR (when the determination in S584 is YES), that is, when the sub CPU 81 has won the rare role, the sub CPU 81 is set to the value of the combo counter. 1 is added (S585).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combo counter is the specific number of combos (S586).

In S586, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is not the specific combo number (NO determination in S586), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S588 described later. On the other hand, in S586, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combo counter is the specific combo number (when the determination in S586 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional game number lottery process at the time of combo (S587). This process is performed in the same manner as the process of S582. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of games added at the time of combo.

After the processing of S577, S578 or S587, or when the determination of S584 or S586 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the BGZ stock lottery processing (during ART) (S588). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 150) and is based on the presence or absence of a short lock (game lock of lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , The winning / non-winning of the stock of BGZ and the type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR continuation flag is "1" or the number of XR continuation games is "1" (S589).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S589 that the determination condition of S589 is not satisfied (NO determination in S589), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S594 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S589 that the determination condition of S589 is satisfied (when the determination in S589 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games during combo to the number of additional games (total) in XR (when the determination in S589 is YES). S590).

After the processing of S590, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XR basic games to the number of additional games (total) in XR (S591). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of XR addition games (normal) to the number of XR addition games (total) (S592). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games added during XR (total) to the number of remaining ART games (S593). In this embodiment, the number of each game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the addition processing of S590 to S593.

After the processing of S593, or when the determination of S589 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition processing (S594). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and based on the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination, the migration destination pseudo-bonus lottery mode The value (0 to 2) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR continuation flag is "0" (S5).
95).

In S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not "0" (when the determination in S595 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S597 described later. On the other hand, in S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is "0" (when the determination in S595 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR emission processing described with reference to FIG. 273 (S596). ).

After the processing of S596, or when the determination of S595 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the push order navigation generation lottery processing (S597). In this process, when the XR carnival transition flag is on, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 184 to 187), and the current RT game state and the inside. Based on the winning combination, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. The XR carnival transition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the XRC mode is confirmed, and if the transition to the XRC mode is confirmed, "1" is set in the XR carnival transition flag. ..

In the process of S597, when the XR carnival transition flag is off and the value of the effect state is "0", the sub CPU 81 uses the push order navigation lottery (effect state 0) table (FIGS. 204 to FIG. (Refer to 207), the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. When the XR carnival transition flag is off and the effect state is "1", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 1) table (see FIGS. 208 to 211). The winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. Further, when the XR carnival transition flag is off and the effect state is "2", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 212 to 215). The winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. Further, when the state of the main control circuit 41 and the state of the sub control circuit 42 are inconsistent, the sub CPU 81 pushes with reference to the push order navigation lottery (effect state 2) table (see FIGS. 212 to 215). The type of winning / non-winning and push order navigation of the forward navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival transition flag is "1" (S598).

In S598, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is "1" (when the determination in S598 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode in the sub game state (S599). By this processing, the game of the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XRC shown in FIG. 280, which will be described later, is performed.

After the processing of S599, the sub CPU 81 sets the XR return flag to "1" (S600). The XR return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the XR mode after the game in the XRC mode is completed. When returning to the XR mode after the game in the XRC mode is completed, the XR return flag is set to the XR return flag. "1" is set. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S601). Then, after the processing of S601, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XR.

On the other hand, in S598, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival transition flag is not "1" (when the determination in S598 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag "1". Whether or not it is determined (S602).

In S602, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is "1" (when the determination in S602 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR processing. On the other hand, in S602, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not "1" (when the determination in S602 is NO), does the sub CPU 81 determine whether the value of the XR continuation flag is "0"? Whether or not it is determined (S603).

In S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is not "0" (when the determination in S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub game state (S604). By this processing, the game of the XR mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during XR is performed. Then, after the processing of S604, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XR.

On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR continuation flag is "0" (when the determination in S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S605). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272 is performed. Then, after the processing of S605, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XR.

As described above, in the process during XR of the present embodiment, winning / non-winning of continuation of the XR mode is determined by lottery (S572), and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for determining the continuation of the XR mode (predetermined mode continuation determining means) by lottery. Further, in the XR intermediate processing of the present embodiment, the number of XR basic games (first unit game number), the number of additional games during XR (normal) (second unit game number), and the addition during combo are added according to various triggers. The number of games (the number of third unit games) is appropriately added to the number of remaining ART games, and these addition processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 has means for adding these various additional games to the number of remaining ART games (first unit game number adding means, second unit game number adding means, third). It also serves as a unit game number addition means). Further, in the XR processing of the present embodiment, the addition processing (S580 and S585) of the combo number (predetermined addition parameter) is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for adding the number of combos (addition parameter adding means).

[Processing during XR (winning)]
Next, the processing during XR (winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 279.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR carnival direct migration flag is "1" (S611).

In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is not "1" (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR intermediate processing (winning). On the other hand, in S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR carnival direct transition flag is "1" (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the first stop operation of the stop button by the player. It is determined whether or not the navigation was followed (S612).

In S612, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation does not follow the navigation (NO determination in S612), the sub CPU 81 ends the XR processing (winning). On the other hand, in S612, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the first stop operation follows the navigation (when the determination in S612 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XRC mode in the sub game state (S613). By this processing, the game of the XRC mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XRC shown in FIG. 280, which will be described later, is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S614). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the XR carnival winning flag (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XR (winning).

[Processing during XRC]
Next, the XRC processing performed in the XRC mode will be described with reference to FIG. 280.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S621). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo-bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), as in the process of S361 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (during ART) (S622). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (during ART) table (see FIGS. 61 to 66), the pseudo-bonus lottery mode, the presence / absence of the pseudo-bonus stock (between flags / non-flags), and the internal winning. Based on the winning combination, the types of winning / non-winning and pseudo-bonus at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling processing (S623). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 has the same processing as S366 in the normal processing (see FIG. 265). Performs the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) (S624). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ stock lottery (during ART) table (see FIG. 150) and is based on the presence or absence of a short lock (game lock of lock number "1" or "2") and the internal winning combination. , The winning / non-winning of the stock of BGZ and the type of BGZ mode (BGZ mode 1 or 2) at the time of winning are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC continuation flag is 1 or the value of the XRC start flag is 1 (S625). The XRC continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to continue the XRC mode. If the continuous game lock lottery process (S94, S97 in FIG. 244) is applied and the continuation of the XRC mode is confirmed, the XRC continuation flag is determined. "1" is set in the XRC continuation flag. Further, the XRC start flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start the XRC mode, and is the XRC start flag when the XRC mode is set to the sub-game state (for example, S613 in FIG. 279). Is set to "1".

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S625 that the determination condition of S625 is not satisfied (NO determination in S625), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S628 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S625 that the determination condition of S625 is satisfied (when the determination in S625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery 1 process for the number of additional games in the XR carnival (S626). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival additional addition 1 lottery table (see FIG. 144), and determines the number of ART additional games by lottery based on the number of locks. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result to the number of games (stop) added to XRC.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the extra game number lottery 2 process in the XR carnival (S627). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR carnival additional addition 2 lottery table (see FIG. 145), and determines the number of ART additional games by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result in the number of games (lever) on which XRC is added.

After the processing of S627, or when the determination of S625 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition processing (S628). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition table (see FIGS. 119 to 121), and based on the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode value and the internal winning combination, the migration destination pseudo-bonus lottery mode The value (0 to 2) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (carnival transition) (S629). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XR carnival transition) table (see FIGS. 184 to 187), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of games added during XRC (stop) to the number of remaining ART games (S630). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games (lever) in XRC to the number of remaining ART games (S631).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (S632). The XRC end flag is a flag indicating whether or not to end the game in the XRC mode, and is a flag indicating whether or not to end the game in the XRC mode. Case), "2" is set in the XRC end flag.

In S632, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is not "2" (when the determination in S632 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S635 described later. On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (when the determination in S632 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR return flag is "0". (S633).

In S633, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is not "0" (when the determination in S633 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S635 described later. On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is "0" (when the determination in S635 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR emission processing described with reference to FIG. 273 (S634). ).

After the processing of S634, or when S632 or S633 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (S635).

In S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is not "2" (when the determination in S635 is NO), that is, when the XRC mode is continued, the sub CPU 81 is in the XRC mode in the sub game state. Is set (S636). By this processing, the game of the XRC mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during XRC is performed. Then, after the processing of S636, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XRC.

On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XRC end flag is "2" (when the determination in S635 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the XR return flag is "1". (S637).

In S637, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is not "1" (when the determination in S637 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S638). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272 is performed. Then, after the processing of S638, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XRC.

On the other hand, in S637, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR return flag is "1" (when the determination in S637 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub game state (S639). By this processing, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XR shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 is performed. Then, after the processing of S639, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XRC.

As described above, in the XRC intermediate processing of the present embodiment, the number of additional games in various XRCs is added to the number of remaining ART games (S630 and S631), and these addition processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (first addition means and second addition means) for performing various addition processes of the number of ART games performed in the XRC intermediate process.

[Rocket processing]
Next, the in-rocket processing performed in the rocket mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 and 282.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a game number counting process (S641). In this process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games digested after the end of the pseudo-bonus (adds 1 to the value of the game number counter), as in the process of S361 in the normal middle process (see FIG. 265).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is "1" (S642). The rocket mode continuation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to continue the rocket mode game after the rocket mode game for a predetermined period (50 games in the present embodiment) is completed. Then, when the rocket mode game is continued (for example, in the rocket mode game of 50 games, when the pseudo bonus is not won), "1" is set in the rocket mode continuation flag. The rocket mode continuation flag is set in the rocket mode continuation lottery of S654 described later.

In S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S642 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 described later.

On the other hand, in S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S642 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the number of rocket mode initial games as the number of rocket mode remaining games. Set (S643). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode initial game number in the rocket mode remaining game number counter. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the rocket mode continuation flag (S644).

After the processing of S644 or when the determination in S642 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of games remaining in the rocket mode (value of the number of games remaining in the rocket mode counter) is "1" or more (S645).

In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is not "1" or more (when the determination in S645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S648 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is "1" or more (when the determination in S645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MB is operating (when the determination is YES). S646).

When it is determined in S646 that the sub CPU 81 is operating the MB (when the determination in S646 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S648 described later. On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MB is not in operation (when the determination in S646 is NO), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the number of games remaining in the rocket mode (value of the game counter remaining in the rocket mode) (the value of the game remaining in the rocket mode). S647).

After the processing of S647, if S645 is a NO determination or S646 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode to "3" (S648). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery process (rocket mode) (S649). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (in the rocket) table (see FIG. 69), and based on the internal winning combination, the type of the pseudo-bonus winning / non-winning and the pseudo-bonus at the time of winning is selected by lottery. decide.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S650).

In S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has not been won (when the determination in S650 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described later. On the other hand, in S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus has been won (when the determination in S650 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (at the time of winning the pseudo bonus) (S651). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (pseudo-bonus winning) table (see FIGS. 85 to 87), and based on the pseudo-bonus lottery mode and the winning type of the pseudo-bonus, the presence / absence of the winning in the XR mode and the winning. The XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time are determined by lottery.

After the processing of S651, or when the determination of S650 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the ceiling processing (S652). In this process, when the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games, the sub CPU 81 has the same processing as S366 in the normal processing (see FIG. 265). Performs the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of games remaining in the rocket mode (value of the number of games remaining in the rocket mode counter) is "0" (S653).

In S653, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is not "0" (when the determination in S653 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S655 described later.

On the other hand, in S653, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is "0" (when the determination in S653 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the rocket mode continuous lottery process (S654). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the rocket mode continuation lottery table (see FIG. 147), and determines the continuation / termination of the rocket mode by lottery based on the stock status of the pseudo bonus. Then, when the rocket mode continuation lottery is won, the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode continuation flag to "1".

After the processing of S654, or when the determination of S653 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the push order navigation generation lottery processing (ART) (S655). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 180 to 183), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation winning / non-winning and The type of push order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of games remaining in the rocket mode (value of the number of games remaining in the rocket mode counter) is "0" (S656).

In S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is not "0" (when the determination in S656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode in the sub game state (S657). By this processing, the game of the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during the rocket is performed. Then, after the processing of S657, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the rocket.

On the other hand, in S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the rocket mode is "0" (when the determination in S656 is YES), is the sub CPU 81 the value of the rocket mode continuation flag "1"? Whether or not it is determined (S658).

In S658, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S658 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the rocket mode in the sub game state (S659). By this processing, the game of the rocket mode is started again from the next game, and the processing during the rocket is performed. Then, after the processing of S659, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the rocket.

On the other hand, in S658, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the rocket mode continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S658 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the pseudo bonus lottery mode to "0". (S660). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a 1G continuous stock (S661).

In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no 1G continuous stock (NO determination in S661), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S662). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272 is performed. Then, after the processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the rocket.

On the other hand, in S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a 1G continuous stock (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen state in the sub game state (S663). By this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process in the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 285, which will be described later, is performed. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released in the pseudo-bonus type (S664).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "1G ream" in the stock of the pseudo bonus to be released (S665). Then, after the processing of S665, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing in the rocket.

[Processing during BGZ]
Next, the processing during BGZ performed in BGZ will be described with reference to FIG. 283.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0" (S671).

In S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S674 described later.

On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0" (when the determination in S671 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the BG challenge content lottery process (S672). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge content lottery table (see FIGS. 166 and 167), and based on the value of the BG challenge mode and the internal winning combination, the correct answer of the BG challenge (choice of choice). The content of the incorrect answer is determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (S673).

After the processing of S673, or when the determination in S671 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BGZ extension flag is in the ON state (S674). The BGZ extension flag is set to the ON state when the BG challenge is won in the 7th game of BGZ, that is, when the BG challenge is performed in the 8th game.

In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BGZ extension flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S644 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S679 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S674 that the BGZ extension flag is not in the ON state (NO determination in S674), the sub CPU 81 performs a BG challenge mode transition lottery process (S675). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BG challenge mode transition table (see FIGS. 168 to 175), and determines the migration destination BG challenge mode by lottery based on the current BGZ mode, the internal winning combination, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a “pushing order bell” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S676).

In S676, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the "pushing order bell" (when the determination in S676 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the winning result of the BG challenge mode transition lottery in the BG challenge mode (bell winning). (For) is set (S677). In this embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is the “pushing order bell”, the BG challenge mode transition table is not referred to in the BG challenge mode transition lottery process of S675. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in S677, the BG challenge mode 0 is set in the BG challenge mode (for bell winning). Then, after the processing of S677, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S679 described later.

On the other hand, in S676, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "push order bell" (when the determination in S676 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the winning result of the BG challenge mode transition lottery to the BG challenge mode. (S678).

After the processing of S677 or S678, or when the determination of S674 is YES, the sub CPU 81 clears the BGZ extension flag (S679).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (BGZ mode 2) (S680). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (BGZ mode 2) table (see FIGS. 216 to 219), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of remaining BGZ games is "0" (S681). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BGZ remaining game number counter is "0". The BGZ remaining game counter is set to the initial value "7" when the BGZ mode is set in the sub-game state (for example, S528 in FIG. 274), and then the BGZ remaining game is set for each game in the BGZ mode. The value of the number counter is subtracted by 1.

In S681, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of games remaining in the BGZ is not "0" (when the determination in S681 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BGZ processing.

On the other hand, in S681, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is "0" (when the determination in S681 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0". (S682).

In S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S683). Then, after the processing of S683, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ.

On the other hand, in S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the sub game state to the predetermined sub game state. (S684).

Specifically, when the BGZ is the normal middle BGZ, in S684, the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state to the sub game state. By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle process shown in FIG. 265 is performed. When the BGZ is the BGZ during ART, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state to the sub game state in S684. By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272 is performed. If there is a stock of XR, in S684, the sub CPU 81 sets the XR mode in the sub game state. By this processing, the game of the XR mode is started from the next game, and the processing during XR shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 is performed.

Then, after the processing of S684, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ.

[Processing during BGZ (at the time of winning)]
Next, the process during BGZ (at the time of winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 284.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "pushing order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) has been internally won and the "pushing order bell" has been won (S691).

When it is determined in S691 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the determination condition of S691 (when the determination in S691 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the BG challenge mode (for bell winning) to the BG challenge mode (S692). Then, after the processing of S692, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S694 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S691 that the sub CPU 81 does not satisfy the determination condition of S691 (when the determination in S691 is NO), the sub CPU 81 clears the BG challenge mode (for bell winning) (S693).

After the processing of S692 or S693, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of BGZ remaining games (value of the BGZ remaining games counter) is "0" (S694).

In S694, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is not "0" (when the determination in S694 is NO), the process of S698 described later is performed. On the other hand, in S694, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of remaining BGZ games is "0" (when the determination in S694 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0". Is determined (S695).

In S695, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S695 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S698 described later. On the other hand, in S695, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BG challenge mode is larger than "0" (when the determination in S695 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BGZ extension flag (S696).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the BGZ in the sub game state (S697). By this processing, the game of BGZ is started again from the next game, and the processing during BGZ shown in FIG. 283 is performed.

After the processing of S697, or when S694 or S695 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BG challenge is successful (S698).

In S698, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BG challenge was not successful (NO determination in S698), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ (at the time of winning). On the other hand, in S698, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BG challenge has succeeded (when the determination in S698 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART is in operation (S699).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S699 that the ART is in operation (when the determination in S699 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S701 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S699 that the sub CPU 81 is not operating the ART (when the determination in S699 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparing state to the sub game state (S700). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and the ART preparation process shown in FIG. 268 is performed.

After the processing of S700, or when the determination of S699 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery processing when the BG challenge is successful (S701). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the BG challenge is successful) table (see FIG. 91), and based on the success parameter, the presence or absence of the winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameter (1 to 6) at the time of winning. ) Is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S702). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and determines the migration destination XR ceiling mode by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process when the BG challenge is successful (S703). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 125), and draws the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode based on the values of the XR winning trigger parameters acquired in S701. decide. Then, after the processing of S703, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BGZ (at the time of winning).

As described above, in the process during BGZ (at the time of winning) of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the BG challenge is successful (S698), and this determination process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (specific condition determination means) for determining whether or not the BG challenge is successful. Further, in the process during BGZ (at the time of winning) of the present embodiment, if the BG challenge is successful, a privilege (ART and / or XR mode) is given in the process of S700 and S702, and this process is performed by the sub-control circuit 42. Is executed by. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (privilege granting means) for granting a privilege when the BG challenge is successful.

[Processing during confirmation screen]
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the processing during the confirmation screen performed in the confirmation screen state will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery process (during the confirmation screen) (S711). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (in the confirmation screen) table (see FIG. 67), and draws the types of the pseudo-bonus winning / non-winning and the pseudo-bonus at the time of winning based on the internal winning combination. Determined by.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery process (during the confirmation screen) (S712). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in the confirmation screen) table (see FIG. 74), and based on the internal winning combination, the presence / absence of winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning. ) Is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (S713). In this process, when the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "RB", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (RB transition) table (see FIGS. 188 to 191), and the RT game state and the inside. Based on the winning combination, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. When the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "Red 7 / Don BB", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (Red 7 / Don BB transition) table (see FIGS. 192 to 195) and RT. Based on the game state and the internal winning combination, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. Further, when the type of the winning pseudo-bonus is "XBB", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (XBB transition) table (see FIGS. 196 to 199), and the RT game state and the internal winning combination. Based on, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is in the ON state (S714).

In S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-bonus immediate release flag is on (when the determination in S714 is YES), the sub CPU 81 corresponds to the stock of the pseudo-bonus to be released, the sub-game state and Set the pseudo bonus type (S715). By this processing, the corresponding pseudo-bonus game is started from the next game, and the corresponding sub-game state processing is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen return flag to "1" (S716). The confirmation screen return flag is a flag indicating whether or not to return to the confirmation screen state after the pseudo bonus ends. When returning to the confirmation screen state after the pseudo bonus ends, the confirmation screen return flag is set to "1". "Is set. Then, after the processing of S716, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the confirmation screen.

On the other hand, in S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus immediate release flag is not in the ON state (NO determination in S714), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen state in the sub game state (S717). By this processing, the game in the confirmation screen state is started again from the next game, and the processing in the confirmation screen is performed. Then, after the processing of S717, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the confirmation screen.

[Processing during confirmation screen (winning)]
Next, the process during the confirmation screen (winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 286.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (S721).

In S721, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process (winning) in the confirmation screen. On the other hand, in S721, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the confirmation screen state. (S722).

In S722, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is not the confirmation screen state (NO determination in S722), the sub CPU 81 ends the process (winning) in the confirmation screen. On the other hand, in S722, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is the confirmation screen state (when the determination in S722 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a predetermined sub game state according to the pseudo bonus type (when the sub game state is determined to be YES). S723). By this processing, the game of the pseudo-bonus of the type set from the next game is started, and the corresponding processing during the sub-game state is performed. Then, after the processing of S723, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing (winning) during the confirmation screen.

[Processing during BB]
Next, the BB processing performed in the BB mode will be described with reference to FIG. 287.

First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the BB remaining game number counter (S731). The initial value of the BB remaining game number counter (60 games in this embodiment) is set when the sub-game state is set to the BB mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a set process of the don alignment mode (S732). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery game number table in BB (see FIGS. 92 to 94), and is based on the value of the BB remaining game number counter and the currently set Don alignment mode map number. , Don alignment mode (1-9) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a “don-matching combination” (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 23) (S733).

In S733, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not a "don-matching combination" (when the determination in S733 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S735 described later.

On the other hand, in S733, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the “don matching combination” (when the determination in S733 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the don matching permission flag lottery process (S734). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BB middle don alignment permission flag table (see FIGS. 97 to 105), and refers to the current don alignment lottery mode and the type of “don alignment combination” that is internally won (lower alignment, upper alignment). , Diagonal alignment or middle alignment), and permission / disapproval of stop display of the don alignment symbol combination (on / off of the don alignment permission flag) is determined by lottery.

After the processing of S734, or when the determination of S733 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery processing in BB (S735). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (in BB) table (see FIGS. 75 to 83), and based on the don alignment mode and the internal winning combination, the presence or absence of the winning in the XR mode and the XR winning at the time of winning. The trigger parameters (1 to 6) are determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (during pseudo-bonus) (S736). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (see FIGS. 200 to 203), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the BB remaining game number counter is “0” (S737).

In S737, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S737 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB processing.

On the other hand, in S737, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the BB remaining game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S737 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end waiting state in the sub game state. (S738). By this process, the game in the pseudo-bonus end waiting state is started from the next game, and the pseudo-bonus end waiting process shown in FIG. 291 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S738, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BB.

[Treatment during NRB]
Next, the processing during NRB performed in the NRB mode will be described with reference to FIG. 288.

First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S741). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process by adding the number of bell navigations in the NRB (S742). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB middle navigation additional lottery table (see FIG. 109), and determines the number of additional bell navigations (including non-winning) by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a set process of the XR lottery mode in RB (S743). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB medium XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 95), and is based on the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter and the currently set RB medium XR lottery table mode. Then, the XR lottery mode (0 to 10) in RB is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for forcibly shifting the specified number of games during NRB (S744). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the NRB forced shortening lottery table (see FIG. 110), and determines the winning / non-winning of the NRB forced shortening by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery for forced transition to the specified number of games in the NRB of S744 has been won (S745).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S745 that the lottery for forced transition to the specified number of games in NRB has not been won (when the determination in S745 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S745 that the sub CPU 81 has won the NRB medium specified number of games forced transition lottery (when the determination in S745 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "10" to the RB medium XR lottery mode (when it is determined that S745 is YES). S746). In the present embodiment, when the NRB medium specified number of games forced transition lottery is won, the value of the RB medium XR lottery mode is forcibly set even if the RB medium XR lottery mode is a value other than "10" at that time. It is set to "10".

After the processing of S746 or when the determination of S745 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is "10" (S747). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of staying games in the NRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

In S747, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is not "10" (when the determination in S747 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S755 described later. On the other hand, in S747, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is "10" (when the determination in S747 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the specified game in NRB is achieved. (S748). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the specified game in NRB is achieved) table (see FIG. 88), and selects the presence or absence of the winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning by lottery. decide.

After the processing of S748, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in NRB has been won (S749).

In S749, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in NRB (when the determination in S749 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S755 described later. On the other hand, in S749, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in NRB (when the determination in S749 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S750). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and determines the migration destination XR ceiling mode by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

After the processing of S750, the sub CPU 81 sets the ART return flag to "1" (S751). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR content lottery process when the specified game in NRB is achieved (S752). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 125), and based on the XR winning trigger parameter values (1 to 6) acquired in S748, the number of XR basic games and the XR in the XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for the ART lottery game number table at the start of SRB (S753). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table (see FIG. 118), and determines the table numbers (1 to 28) by lottery based on the transition process to the SRB mode. Then, after the processing of S753, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S754).

After the processing of S754, or when the determination of S747 or S747 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the push order navigation generation lottery processing (during the pseudo bonus) (S755). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (see FIGS. 200 to 203), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "pushing order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S756).

In S756, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "push order bell" (when the determination in S756 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB processing. On the other hand, in S756, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the "push order bell" (when the determination in S756 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the navigation remaining counter during RB (S757). ). The RB in-navigation remaining counter is a counter for managing the number of bell navigations, which is a condition for ending the game in the RB (NRB and SRB) mode, and the initial value of the RB in-navigation remaining counter is RB (in the sub-game state). NRB and SRB) Set when the mode is set.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the navigation remaining counter in RB is "0" (S758).

In S758, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RB middle navigation remaining counter is "0" (when the determination in S758 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end waiting state in the sub game state (when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value is "0" (YES determination in S758). S759). By this process, the game in the pseudo-bonus end waiting state is started from the next game, and the pseudo-bonus end waiting process shown in FIG. 291 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S759, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during NRB.

On the other hand, in S758, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the navigation remaining counter during RB is not "0" (when the determination in S758 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the ART return flag turned on (to 1). Whether or not it is set) is determined (S760).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S760 that the ART return flag is not in the ON state (NO determination in S760), the sub CPU 81 ends the NRB processing.

On the other hand, in S760, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S760 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub game state to the SRB mode state (S761). By this processing, the game of the SRB mode is started from the next game, and the processing during SRB shown in FIG. 289, which will be described later, is performed. Then, after the processing of S761, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during NRB.

As described above, in the NRB in-process of the present embodiment, an additional lottery is performed for each game by the number of bell navigations, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for performing a lottery for increasing the number of bell navigations (means for drawing an increase in the number of notifications). Further, in the NRB processing in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games), a privilege (XR mode) is given, and this processing is performed by the sub-control circuit 42. Will be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (privilege granting means) for granting a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the NRB mode. Further, in the NRB processing in the present embodiment, the number of bell navigations is counted, and it is determined whether or not to end the pseudo bonus based on the number of bell navigations (value of the remaining navigation counter in RB). Then, these processes are executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for counting the number of bell navigations (means for counting the number of notifications) and a means for ending the pseudo bonus based on the number of bell navigations (means for ending the specific gaming state).

[Processing during SRB]
Next, the SRB processing performed in the SRB mode will be described with reference to FIG. 289.

First, the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S771). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a set process of the XR lottery mode in RB (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB medium XR lottery game number table (see FIG. 96), and is based on the value of the RB medium XR lottery game number counter and the currently set RB medium XR lottery table mode. Then, the XR lottery mode (0 to 7) in RB is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART games (S773). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 111 to 117), and based on the value of the XR lottery mode in RB and the internal winning combination, the ART game number addition number (non-). (Including the winning prize) will be decided by lottery.

In this embodiment, the number of digestion games in the SRB mode in which the XR lottery mode in RB is "2" to "6" is set so that the number of ART games can be easily added. For example, the number of digested games from the start of the game in SRB mode is 4 games (specific number of games).
And, when the XR lottery table mode in RB is "1", the XR lottery mode in RB is "6" (see FIG. 96), and in this case, in a role other than the role related to "Don alignment". The addition of 5 games or more is always decided (see FIG. 116). That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games (number of staying games) from the start of the game in the SRB mode reaches a specific number of games, it becomes easy to obtain an addition of the number of ART games.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is “7” (S774). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of staying games in the SRB mode has reached the specified number of games.

In S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is not "7" (when the determination in S774 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S781 described later. On the other hand, in S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the XR lottery mode in RB is "7" (when the determination in S774 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR lottery process when the specified game in SRB is achieved. (S775). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when the specified game in SRB is achieved) table (see FIG. 89), and selects the presence or absence of the winning in the XR mode and the XR winning trigger parameters (1 to 6) at the time of winning by lottery. decide.

After the processing of S775, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in SRB has been won (S776).

In S776, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in SRB (when the determination in S776 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S781 described later. On the other hand, in S776, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery at the time of achieving the specified game in SRB (when the determination in S776 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S777). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and determines the migration destination XR ceiling mode by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

After the processing of S777, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery processing at the time of achieving the specified game in SRB (S778). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 125), and based on the XR winning trigger parameter values (1 to 6) acquired in S775, the number of XR basic games and the XR in the XR mode. The continuation rate is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for the ART lottery game number table at the start of SRB (S779). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the SRB start ART lottery game number table lottery table (see FIG. 118), and determines the table numbers (1 to 28) by lottery based on the transition process to the SRB mode. Then, after the processing of S779, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the XR lottery game number counter in RB (S780).

After the processing of S780, or when the determination of S774 or S77 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the push order navigation generation lottery processing (during the pseudo bonus) (S781). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (see FIGS. 200 to 203), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "pushing order bell" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 38 to 40) (S782).

In S782, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "push order bell" (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the SRB processing.

On the other hand, in S782, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the "push order bell" (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the navigation remaining counter during RB (S783). ). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the navigation remaining counter in RB is "0" (S784).

In S784, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the navigation remaining counter during RB is not "0" (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during SRB.

On the other hand, in S784, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the navigation remaining counter in RB is "0" (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end waiting state in the sub game state. (S785). By this process, the game in the pseudo-bonus end waiting state is started from the next game, and the pseudo-bonus end waiting process shown in FIG. 291 described later is performed. Then, after the processing of S785, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during SRB.

As described above, in the SRB in-process of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games or a specific number of games), the privilege (the winning of the XR mode or the number of ART games) Addition) is added, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (privilege granting means) for granting a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the SRB mode.

[Processing during XBB]
Next, the XBB processing performed in the XBB mode will be described with reference to FIG. 290.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a "don matching fake lip" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 17 to 19) or a "don matching lip" (internal winning combination of winning numbers 20 to 23). (S791).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S791 that the determination condition of S791 is not satisfied (NO determination in S791), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S799 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S791 that the determination condition of S791 is satisfied (YES in S791), the sub CPU 81 performs an XBB continuous lottery process (S792). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB continuous lottery table (see FIG. 106) and draws the types (1 or 2) of the winning / non-winning and winning continuation parameters of the XBB continuation based on the internal winning combination. Determined by.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XBB continuous lottery has been won (S793).

In S793, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XBB continuous lottery (when the determination in S793 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S800 described later. On the other hand, in S793, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB continuous lottery has been won (when the determination in S793 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XBB stock lottery process during the XBB continuation (S794). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XBB stock table during XBB continuation (see FIG. 107), and based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation winning flag (continuation parameter), the winning of the stock in the XBB mode. The non-winning is decided by lottery.

After the processing of S794, the sub CPU 81 performs the XB lottery processing during the continuation of XBB (S795). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (when XBB continuation) table (see FIG. 90), and sets the XR winning trigger parameter based on the type (1 or 2) of the XBB continuation winning flag (continuation parameter). Determined by lottery. Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the XB lottery for continuous XBB has been won (S796).

In S796, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the XR lottery during the continuation of XBB (when the determination in S796 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S800 described later. On the other hand, in S796, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has won the XR lottery during the continuation of XBB (when the determination in S796 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the XR ceiling mode transition lottery process (S797). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR ceiling mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and determines the migration destination XR ceiling mode by lottery based on the current ceiling mode.

After the processing of S797, the sub CPU 81 performs the XR content lottery processing (S798). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR content lottery table (see FIG. 125), and draws the number of XR basic games and the XR continuation rate in the XR mode based on the values of the XR winning trigger parameters acquired in S795. decide. Then, after the processing of S798, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S800 described later.

Here, returning to the process of S791 again, when the determination in S791 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the continuous stock lottery process (normal) during XBB (S799). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the continuous stock lottery (normal) table during XBB (see FIG. 108), and determines the number of stocks in the XBB mode (including non-winning) by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

After the processing of S798 or S799, or when the determination of S793 or S796 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the push order navigation generation lottery processing (during the pseudo bonus) (S800). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (during pseudo-bonus) table (see FIGS. 200 to 203), and based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination, the push order navigation wins / non-wins. The type of winning and pushing order navigation is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to continue the XBB mode (S801).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S801 to continue the XBB mode (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the XBB processing.

On the other hand, in S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the XBB mode is not continued (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the BB mode in the sub game state (S802). By this processing, the game of the BB mode is started from the next game, and the processing during BB shown in FIG. 287 is performed. Then, after the processing of S802, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during XBB.

[Processing waiting for the end of pseudo bonus]
Next, the pseudo-bonus end waiting process performed in the pseudo-bonus end waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. 291.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART return flag is "1" (in the ON state) (S811).

In S811, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART return flag is not "1" (when the determination in S811 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S813 described later. On the other hand, in S811, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART return flag is "1" (when the determination in S811 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART flag to "1" (S812).

After the processing of S812, or when the determination in S181 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo-bonus lottery processing (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) (S813). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo-bonus) table (see FIG. 68), and based on the internal winning combination, the type of the pseudo-bonus winning / non-winning and the pseudo-bonus is selected by lottery. decide.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus lottery has been won (S814).

In S814, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won the pseudo bonus lottery (when the determination in S814 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S816 described later. On the other hand, in S814, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo bonus lottery has been won (when the determination in S814 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen return flag to "1" (S815).

After the processing of S815, or when the determination of S814 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs an XR lottery processing (waiting for a pseudo bonus) (S816). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the XR lottery (waiting for the end of the pseudo bonus) table (see FIG. 84), and determines the winning / non-winning and XR winning trigger parameters of the XR mode by lottery based on the internal winning combination. do.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a push order navigation generation lottery process (S817). In this process, if the value of the ART return flag is "1", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (ART) table (see FIGS. 180 to 183), and refers to the current RT game state and the internal winning combination. Based on, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. If the value of the ART return flag is "0", the sub CPU 81 refers to the push order navigation lottery (normal) table (see FIGS. 176 to 179), and is based on the current RT game state and the internal winning combination. Then, the winning / non-winning of the push order navigation and the type of the push order navigation are determined by lottery. Then, after the processing of S817, the sub CPU 81 ends the pseudo bonus end waiting processing.

[Processing at the end of pseudo bonus (at the time of winning)]
Next, the process at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning) will be described with reference to FIG. 292.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (S821).

In S821, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not other than the RT3 gaming state (NO determination in S821), the sub CPU 81 sets the pseudo bonus end waiting state in the sub gaming state (S822). By this process, the game in the pseudo-bonus end waiting state is started again from the next game, and the pseudo-bonus end waiting process shown in FIG. 291 is performed. Then, after the processing of S822, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning).

On the other hand, in S821, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is other than the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the confirmation screen return flag is on. (S823).

In S823, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the confirmation screen return flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S823 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a value indicating the type of the pseudo bonus stock to be released as a pseudo bonus. Set to type (S824). After the process of S824, the sub CPU 81 sets the confirmation screen state in the sub game state (S825). By this process, the game in the confirmed screen state is started from the next game, and the process in the confirmed screen shown in FIG. 285 is performed. Then, after the processing of S825, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning).

On the other hand, in S823, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the confirmation screen return flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a pseudo bonus lottery transition process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) (S826). .. In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery mode transition (at the end of the pseudo-bonus) table (see FIGS. 122 to 124), and the current pseudo-bonus lottery mode and the pseudo-bonus end type (RB end or BB end). Based on, the type of the pseudo-bonus lottery mode of the migration destination is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a BGZ lottery game number table lottery process (at the end of the pseudo bonus) (S827). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the BGZ lottery game number table lottery table (see FIGS. 151 to 165), and is based on the previous BGZ lottery game number table and the pseudo bonus end type (RB end or BB end). The BGZ lottery table number (1 to 15) is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART return flag is in the ON state (S828).

In S828, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S828 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S834 described later. On the other hand, in S828, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART return flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S828 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART state in the sub game state (S829). By this processing, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the processing during ART shown in FIGS. 270 to 272 is performed.

After the processing of S829, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of XR priority stocks is larger than "0" (S830).

In S830, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is larger than "0" (when the determination in S830 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S833 described later. On the other hand, in S830, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of XR priority stocks is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S830 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the number of normal stocks is larger than "0". (S831).

In S831, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S831 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S833 described later. On the other hand, in S831, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of normal stocks is larger than "0" (YES determination in S831), the sub CPU 81 turns on the normal stock priority flag (S832).

After the processing of S832, if S830 is a YES determination or S831 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor game number lottery process (S833). In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the precursor game number lottery (pseudo-bonus end) table (see FIGS. 228 to 231), and draws the precursor game number (0 to 64 games) based on the stock type to be released. Determined by. Then, after the processing of S833, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning).

Here, returning to S828 again, if S828 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 81 sets the sub game state to the normal state (S834). By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle process shown in FIG. 265 is performed. Then, after the processing of S834, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the end of the pseudo bonus (at the time of winning).

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment, which is another embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following, only the differences between the second embodiment and the first embodiment will be described, and the common points between the second embodiment and the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 in the second embodiment, the point that the battle BGZ is added to the winning type of the BGZ mode determined in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) during the normal processing (see FIG. 265) is the first implementation. It is different from the form. Further, in the above BGZ stock lottery (normal time), when the battle BGZ is determined as the BGZ mode, the sub CPU 81 replaces the BGZ middle processing (see FIG. 283) with the battle BGZ middle processing (see FIG. 296 described later). Is performed, and the battle BGZ (winning) process (see FIG. 297 described later) is executed instead of the BGZ (at the time of winning) process (see FIG. 284), which is different from the first embodiment.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 in the second embodiment, in the above-mentioned ceiling processing (for example, S366 in FIG. 265), it is determined whether or not the value of the CZ ceiling counter described later is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value, and the value is equal to or higher than the CZ ceiling value. In this case, the point that the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR is performed is different from the first embodiment.

By the battle BGZ middle process (see FIG. 296 described later) and the battle BGZ (winning) process (see FIG. 297 described later) executed by the sub CPU 81, the additional value is drawn prior to the ART lottery, and then the ART lottery is performed. Game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "battle BGZ") is performed. When the ART is won by the ART lottery in the battle BGZ, the number of games corresponding to the winning additional value is added to the number of ART initial games. On the other hand, when the ART is not won in the ART lottery in the battle BGZ, the winning additional value is added to the CZ ceiling counter described later.

The sub RAM 83 (see FIG. 6) in the present embodiment has an additional value counter described later in addition to the various counters in the description of the first embodiment described above. Further, it has a CZ ceiling counter to which the above-mentioned additional value is added under predetermined conditions.

Further, the sub RAM 83 has a battle BGZ remaining game number storage area for storing the battle BGZ remaining game number described later.

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 295. In the sub ROM 82 of the present embodiment, in addition to the various data tables (FIGS. 55 to 238) described in the first embodiment, the data tables shown in FIGS. 293 to 295 are stored.

[BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table]
FIG. 293 is a diagram showing the configuration of a BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. In the present embodiment, the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table shown in FIG. 293 is based on the presence or absence of an internal winning combination and a lock game in the BGZ stock lottery processing (normal time) during the normal processing (see FIG. 265). , Is used in place of the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table shown in FIG. 149 when determining the winning type (including non-winning) of the BGZ mode.

The BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table is set for each type of combination of presence / absence of lock game and internal winning combination, and the winning type of BGZ mode (non-winning, BGZ mode 1 winning, BGZ mode 2 winning and battle BGZ). The correspondence between the winning) and the lottery value is specified.

BGZ stock lottery (normal time) The contents of the combination type "S no other", "S chance eye", "S no R2 ice" of the presence or absence of the lock game specified in the table and the internal winning combination are shown in the figure. Since the contents described in 149 are the same, the description here will be omitted.

Further, the "BGZ mode 1" specified in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table corresponds to the BGZ without navigation, and the "BGZ mode 2" corresponds to the BGZ with navigation. Further, "battle BGZ" corresponds to BGZ in which the later-described battle BGZ processing and battle BGZ processing (at the time of winning) are performed.

In the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) using the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each winning type (including non-winning) in the BGZ mode in the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type of the BGZ mode at that time is winning.

For example, when the combination type of the presence / absence of the lock game and the internal winning combination is "S-less chance", the BGZ mode is not won with a probability of 24576/32768, and the BGZ mode 1 is set with a probability of 7864/32768. Winning, BGZ mode 2 wins with a probability of 164/32768, and battle BGZ wins with a probability of 164/32768.

[Additional price lottery table]
Next, the additional value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 294. The additional price lottery table is used when the additional value is determined based on the internal winning combination in the additional price lottery process during the battle BGZ intermediate process (see FIG. 296) described later.

The additional value lottery table is set for each internal winning combination, and the types of additional values (no additional value, 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300 and 333) and their lottery values. Prescribe the correspondence with. The type of the internal winning combination specified in the additional value lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables in the first embodiment. Therefore, here, the description of the content of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the additional value lottery table is omitted.

In the additional value lottery process using the additional value lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is added to the additional value lottery table. In, the lottery value for each type of additional value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the additional value at that time is won.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "15 bells", there is a probability of 16384/32768 to win the additional value "20", and a probability of 8192/32768 to win the additional value "30", 7680/32768. The additional value "50" is won with the probability of. Further, in the same case, the additional value "100" is won with the probability of 480/32768, and the additional value "200" is won with the probability of 32/32768.

[ART lottery table]
Next, the ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 295. The ART lottery table is used to determine the winning or non-winning of the ART based on the internal winning combination in the ART lottery processing during the battle BGZ during the battle BGZ middle processing (see FIG. 296) described later.

The ART lottery table defines the correspondence between the non-winning or ART winning types set for each internal winning combination and the lottery value. The type of the internal winning combination specified in the additional value lottery table is the same as that of the various pseudo-bonus lottery tables in the first embodiment. Therefore, here, the description of the contents of the type of the internal winning combination specified in the ART lottery table will be omitted.

In the ART lottery process using the ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is added to the additional value lottery table. The lottery value for each type of is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the type of non-winning or ART winning at that time is determined as a result of the lottery.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "determined cherry", "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 24051/32768, and "ART winning" is determined with a probability of 8107/32768 (winning ART). .. The probability that "ART win" is determined in the ART lottery table is as follows: XR win trigger parameters 1 to 6 (priority release) and XR win trigger parameters 1 to 4 in the XR lottery (normal) table (see FIG. 70). (Post-release) is set higher than the probability of winning.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 (see FIG. 6) of the sub control circuit 42 of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. Of the processes executed in the present embodiment, the processes common to the various processes executed in the first embodiment will be omitted.

[Normal processing]
In the sub CPU 81 of the present embodiment, in the ceiling processing (S366) during the normal processing (see FIG. 265), the current game (unit game) is a game with the number of XR ceiling games or a game with the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games. If there is, the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR or at the time of winning the pseudo bonus is performed. Further, the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ ceiling counter of the sub RAM 83, determines whether or not the value of the CZ ceiling counter is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value (1000 in the present embodiment), and determines that the value is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value. In this case, a predetermined process (such as the above-mentioned XR content lottery process) at the time of winning the XR is performed, and the CZ ceiling counter is cleared. The predetermined CZ ceiling value can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) of S368 during the normal middle process (see FIG. 265), the sub CPU 81 uses the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table shown in FIG. Based on the presence or absence of the game, the winning type of the BGZ mode is determined to be either non-winning, BGZ mode 1 winning, BGZ mode 2 winning, or battle BGZ winning.

[Normal state transition processing]
In S393 during the normal middle state transition process (see FIG. 266), the sub CPU 81 of the present embodiment sets the BGZ in the sub game state when the type of the normal stock to be released is BGZ. As a result, the BGZ game is started from the next game. It should be noted that the stocked BGZ is accompanied by information on the winning type (BGZ mode 1 winning, BGZ mode 2 winning or battle BGZ winning) determined in the above-mentioned BGZ stock lottery process (normal time). ing. When the determined winning type of the BGZ mode is BGZ mode 1 winning or BGZ mode 2 winning, the BGZ game in which the BGZ middle processing shown in FIG. 283 and the BGZ middle (at the time of winning) processing shown in FIG. 284 are performed is the next game. It starts from. On the other hand, when the winning type of the determined BGZ mode is battle BGZ, the BGZ game in which the later-described battle BGZ processing in FIG. 296 and the battle BGZ in FIG. 297 (at the time of winning) is performed is started from the next game. ..

[Battle BGZ processing]
Next, the process during battle BGZ will be described with reference to FIG. 296. In the battle BGZ processing, after the winning type of the BGZ mode is determined to be the battle BGZ in the BGZ stock lottery processing (normal time) of S368 during the normal processing (see FIG. 265), the sub-game state is based on this BGZ stock. Is set in the BGZ and is started for each unit game of the battle BGZ game.

First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the battle BGZ remaining game number storage area of the sub RAM 83, and determines whether or not the battle BGZ remaining game number is larger than 0 (S901). The number of remaining games in the battle BGZ is the number of games for which the additional value lottery (S902) described later is performed in the process during the battle BGZ, and in the present embodiment, "7" is set as the initial value. Note that this initial value is set in the battle BGZ remaining game number storage area, for example, when the sub-game state shifts from the sub-game state other than BGZ to BGZ. The initial value can be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined in S901 that the number of remaining games in the battle BGZ is not larger than 0 (when the determination in S901 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S905 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S901 that the number of remaining games in the battle BGZ is larger than 0 (when the determination in S901 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the additional value lottery table (FIG. 294) based on the internal winning combination and the random number value in the game. (See) is used to perform an additional value lottery process (S902).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the added value is won (S903). Specifically, whether or not the type of the additional value as a result of the lottery is other than no additional value, that is, 5, 7, 10, 20, 30, 50, 77, 100, 200, 300 or 333. To determine.

When it is determined in S903 that the additional value has not been won (when the determination in S903 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S903 that the additional value has been won (when the determination in S903 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the winning additional value to the additional value counter of the sub RAM 83 (S904). Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ. The sub CPU 81 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the winning additional value and the value of the additional value counter at a predetermined timing.

Here, returning to the explanation of the processing of S901 again, when it is determined in S901 that the number of remaining battle BGZ games is not larger than 0 (when the determination in S901 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is disturbed by the internal winning combination in the game. Based on the numerical value, the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ is performed using the ART lottery table (see FIG. 295) (S905).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART has been won as a result of the ART lottery process (S905) during the battle BGZ (S906). When it is determined in S906 that the ART has been won (when the determination in S906 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a value corresponding to the value of the additional value counter to the number of remaining ART games (in the present embodiment, the value of the additional value counter itself). Is added, and the additional value counter is cleared (S907). As a result, the value of the additional value counter, that is, the number of games corresponding to the additional value won by the additional value lottery is added to the initial number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) at the start of the next ART. Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ. The sub CPU 81 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display at a predetermined timing that the ART has been won and that the initial number of games of the ART has been added.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S906 that the ART has not been won (when the determination in S906 is NO), the sub CPU 81 adds a value to the CZ ceiling counter of the sub RAM 83 according to the value of the counter (addition value in the present embodiment). The value of the counter itself) is added, and the additional value counter is cleared (S908). Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ. The sub CPU 81 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the fact that the ART has not been won, the fact that the value of the additional value counter has been added to the CZ ceiling counter, and the value of the CZ ceiling counter at a predetermined timing.

[Processing during battle BGZ (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the processing during the battle BGZ (at the time of winning) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the battle BGZ remaining game number storage area of the sub RAM 83, and determines whether or not the battle BGZ remaining game number is larger than 0 (S911). When it is determined in S911 that the number of battle BGZ remaining games is larger than 0 (when the determination in S911 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the number of battle BGZ remaining games stored in the battle BGZ remaining game number storage area (when the determination in S911 is YES). S912). Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ (at the time of winning).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S911 that the number of remaining games in the battle BGZ is not larger than 0 (when the determination in S911 is NO), whether or not the sub CPU 81 has won the ART by the ART lottery during the battle BGZ (see S905 in FIG. 296). (S913).

When it is determined in S913 that the ART has been won (when the determination in S913 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART preparing state to the sub-game state (S914). By this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game, and the ART preparation process shown in FIG. 268 is performed. Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ (at the time of winning).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S913 that the ART has not been won (when the determination in S913 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal state in the sub game state (S915). By this process, the game in the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal middle process shown in FIG. 265 is performed. Then, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during the battle BGZ (at the time of winning).

<Action of the second embodiment>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the battle BGZ, the sub CPU 81 plays 7 games in which the additional value lottery (S901 in the figure) is performed prior to the ART lottery process in the battle BGZ (see S907 in FIG. 296). Further, when the ART is not won in the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ, the added value won in the additional value lottery is not wasted and is added to the CZ ceiling counter (S908 in the figure). Further, in S915 of the next battle BGZ (at the time of winning) processing (see FIG. 297), the normal state is set in the sub-game state. Then, in the ceiling processing during normal processing (see S366 in FIG. 265), the sub CPU 81 refers to the CZ ceiling counter, and whether the value of the CZ ceiling counter is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value (1000 in the present embodiment). If it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value, a predetermined process at the time of winning the XR (the above-mentioned XR content lottery process, etc.) is performed. That is, the number of games until the value of the CZ ceiling counter reaches a predetermined CZ ceiling value changes according to the result of the additional value lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that he / she will win a large additional price in the game in which the additional price lottery is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the value of the CZ ceiling counter reaches a predetermined CZ ceiling value.

In addition, when the ART is won in the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ, the additional value won in the additional value lottery is added to the number of remaining ART games. As a result, the number of games corresponding to the additional value won by the additional value lottery is added to the number of ART initial games (50 games in the present embodiment) at the start of the next ART. That is, the number of ART initial games is determined first before the ART lottery. Therefore, in a game in which an additional value lottery is performed before the ART lottery, the player can play the game in the expectation that a large additional value will be won. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game before the ART lottery.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the importance of the ART lottery changes depending on the result of the additional value lottery performed prior to the ART lottery. For example, when a large additional price is won in the additional price lottery, the player can play a game in which the ART lottery is performed with a strong expectation of winning the ART lottery. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game of performing the ART lottery.

<Modification example>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, including their actions and effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and includes various embodiments and modifications as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in the pachi-slot machines 1 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 may perform various processes performed by the sub CPU 81.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the BGZ stock lottery (normal time) table shown in FIG. 293 is used in the BGZ stock lottery process (normal time) of S368 during the normal middle process (see FIG. 265). The mode of determining the winning type of the BGZ mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the BGZ stock lottery process (during ART) during various processes (for example, ART preparation process, ART process, XR process, XRC process), the BGZ stock lottery process shown in FIG. (Normal time) The winning type of the BGZ mode may be determined using the table. In this case, when the battle BGZ wins as the BGZ mode, in the battle BGZ processing, instead of the ART lottery (S905) during the battle BGZ, a process of drawing whether or not the additional value can be added to the number of remaining ART games is selected. conduct. Further, the processing of S913 to S915 in the processing during the battle BGZ (at the time of winning) is omitted, and when the determination in S911 is YES, the processing for returning the sub-game state to the predetermined game state is performed. For example, when the BGZ is the BGZ in the ART, the ART state is set in the sub-game state.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the CZ ceiling counter is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value, the sub CPU 81 performs a predetermined process at the time of winning the XR (the above-mentioned XR content lottery process, etc.). Aspects have been described. However, not limited to this, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the CZ ceiling counter is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value, the sub CPU 81 may perform a predetermined process at the time of winning the pseudo bonus.

Further, when the ART is won in the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ, the additional value won in the additional value lottery is added to the number of remaining ART games, and the mode of the ART managed by the number of games is extended. However, not limited to this, in the case of a gaming machine that manages the period of ART by the so-called difference number, the ART managed by the difference number so that the number of medals that the player can obtain increases by the winning additional value. The period may be extended. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that manages the ART period by the number of notifications, that is, the number of navigations, the number of allowed navigations is increased by the winning additional value, and the ART period managed by the number of navigations is extended. You may do it.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, in the battle BGZ processing, the value of the additional value counter is added to the number of remaining ART games (see S907 in FIG. 296), or the value of the additional value counter is added to the CZ ceiling counter. (S908 in the figure) is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of adding the value of the additional value counter itself, a predetermined value corresponding to the value of the additional value counter may be added. For example, a value obtained by adding 100 to the value of the additional value counter may be added to the number of remaining ART games, or a value twice the value of the additional value counter may be added to the CZ ceiling counter.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the embodiment in which the number of ART initial games is set to 50 (50 games) has been described. However, not limited to this, the number of ART initial games can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of ART initial games may be set to 0. In this case, in the second embodiment, when the ART is won by the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ, the number of games corresponding to the additional value won by the additional value lottery becomes the number of ART initial games.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of ART initial games may be determined by lottery from a plurality of options (for example, 0, 50, 100, 200).

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the value of the CZ ceiling counter reaches a predetermined CZ ceiling value, the CZ ceiling counter is cleared, that is, until the value of the CZ ceiling counter reaches the predetermined CZ ceiling value. The mode of not clearing the ceiling counter was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CZ ceiling counter may be cleared when the player is in an advantageous state, for example, when the sub-game state is set to the XR mode or the pseudo bonus. Further, if it is decided to shift to a state advantageous to the player, for example, if the XR lottery or the pseudo bonus lottery is won, the CZ ceiling counter may be cleared.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the number of games reaches the number of XR ceiling games, the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR (so-called XR ceiling function) and the number of games are the number of pseudo-bonus ceiling games. In addition to performing the predetermined processing at the time of winning the pseudo-bonus (so-called pseudo-bonus ceiling function), when the value of the CZ ceiling counter is equal to or higher than the predetermined CZ ceiling value, the predetermined processing at the time of winning the XR is performed. The mode of performing (so-called CZ ceiling function) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the XR ceiling function and the pseudo-bonus ceiling function may not be provided, and only the CZ ceiling function may be provided as a so-called ceiling function.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the sub CPU 81 always causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the total value of the ART initial game number and the additional value (value of the additional value counter) during the game of the battle BGZ. May be good.
Further, the sub CPU 81 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the number of ART initial games when the game of the battle BGZ is started, and thereafter, when the additional value is won by the additional value lottery process, the sub CPU 81 displays the liquid crystal display device 11. The winning additional value may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the total value of the winning additional values (value of the additional counter) may be constantly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, or the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ (see S905 in FIG. 296) during the final game, that is, in the game of the battle BGZ. ) May be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 only during the unit game. In particular, before displaying the lottery result of the ART lottery process during the battle BGZ, it is preferable to notify the total number of ART initial games and the additional value (value of the additional value counter).

Further, in the second embodiment, the embodiment in which the sub CPU 81 performs an additional value lottery (see S902 in FIG. 296) and an ART lottery during the battle BGZ (S905 in the same figure) based on the internal winning combination has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lottery (decision) methods may be adopted in the additional value lottery and the ART lottery during the battle BGZ. For example, as a lottery method, a lottery based on a display combination, a push order hitting a stop order determined by the lottery, or a lottery triggered by an operation of a staging button separately provided on the front door 2b may be adopted. good. In particular, it is preferable to adopt a lottery method different between the lottery method of the additional price lottery and the lottery method of the ART lottery during the battle BGZ, because it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games.

Further, in the second embodiment, a plurality of types of battle BGZ may be provided. In this case, even if a plurality of additional value lottery tables and ART lottery tables having different probabilities of winning the additional value and winning the ART are provided, and the lottery is performed using different tables according to the type of battle BGZ. good.
Further, when a plurality of types of battle BGZ are provided, an additional value lottery or an ART lottery during the BGZ may be performed by a different lottery method depending on the type of the battle BGZ.

Further, in the second embodiment, the lottery value related to the type of additional value "no additional value" in the additional value lottery table (FIG. 294) is set to 0, and when the additional value lottery is performed, the additional value of 1 or more is always added. May win.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 11 ... LCD display Device, 16 ... start lever, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 22L, 22R ... production switch, 41 ... main control circuit, 42 ... sub control circuit, 50 ... microcomputer, 51 ... Main CPU, 52 ... Main ROM, 53 ... Main RAM, 56 ... Random generator, 81 ... Sub CPU, 82 ... Sub ROM, 83 ... Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a first state and a second state as game states for notifying information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and can be given a privilege according to the game result.
A specific symbol combination can be displayed when a specific combination is won in the first state.
When the specific combination is won in the first state, the information regarding the stop operation for avoiding the display of the specific symbol combination is notified.
When the specific combination is won in the second state, the information regarding the stop operation for displaying all the symbol combinations including the symbol combinations other than the specific symbol combination is not notified, or the specific symbol combination is used. Notifies information about the stop operation to be displayed,
The privilege is not given when the specific combination is won in the first state, and is given when the specific combination is won in the second state.
The privilege grants the right to perform the third state.
The third state is a gaming state that is different from the first state and the second state and that informs information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images